Mercedes AMGGT 2017 Handleiding

Mercedes Personenwagen AMGGT 2017

Lees hieronder de 📖 handleiding in het Nederlandse voor Mercedes AMGGT 2017 (286 pagina's) in de categorie Personenwagen. Deze handleiding was nuttig voor 47 personen en werd door 2 gebruikers gemiddeld met 4.5 sterren beoordeeld

Download PDF

Pagina 1/286

Mercedes-AMG GT and Mercedes-AMG GT S

Operator's Manual

Order no. P190 0054 13 Part no. 190 584 06 02 Edition B-2017

É19058406026ËÍ

1905840602

Mercedes-AMG GT and Mercedes-AMG GT S

Publication details

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the

following websites:

http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or

otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-

out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG

Mercedesstrae 137

70327 Stuttgart

Germany

Symbols

Registered trademarks:

RBluetooth®is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth SIG Inc.

RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.

RDolby®and MLP™ are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.

RBabySmart™, ESP®and PRE-SAFE®are reg-

istered trademarks of Daimler AG.

RHomeLink®is a registered trademark of John-

son Controls.

RiPod®and iTunes®are registered trademarks

of Apple Inc.

RBurmester®is a registered trademark of

Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.

RMicrosoft®and Windows media®are regis-

tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

RSIRIUS®is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM Radio Inc.

RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.

RGracenote®is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.

RZAGAT Survey®and related brands are regis-

tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-

lowing symbols:

GWARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangers

which could pose a threat to your health or

life, or to the health and life of others.

HEnvironmental note

Environmental notes provide you with infor-

mation on environmentally aware actions or

disposal.

!Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-

cle.

iPractical tips or further information that

could be helpful to you.

XThis symbol indicates an instruction

that must be followed.

XSeveral of these symbols in succession

indicate an instruction with several

steps.

page)

This symbol tells you where you can find

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Adjusting lumbar support .................. 77

Adjusting the volume

Multimedia system ........................ 197

Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 48

Display message ............................ 171

Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) ....................................... 42

Important safety notes .................... 41

Introduction ..................................... 41

Knee bag .......................................... 42

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 43

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 37

Side impact air bag .......................... 42

Window curtain air bag .................... 43

Air vents

Important safety notes .................... 96

Setting ............................................. 96

Setting the side air vents ................. 97

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 60

Switching off (ATA) .......................... 60

Switching the function on/off

(ATA) ................................................ 60

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG

Adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem ................................................ 135

E-SELECT lever .............................. 106

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 158

Performance Seat ............................ 78

SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sport

transmission .................................. 106

AMG ceramic brakes ......................... 122

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .................................. 122

AMG sports exhaust system ............ 103

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 209

Assistance display (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 155

Assistance menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 156

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 228

Hiding a service message .............. 228

Resetting the service interval dis-

play ................................................ 228

Service message ............................ 228

Special service requirements ......... 228

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 60

Function ........................................... 60

Switching off the alarm .................... 60

4Index

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating .................157

Display message ............................ 176

Function/notes .............................142

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 173

see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ...............229

Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) ....................................103

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 102

Automatic headlamp mode ................ 85

Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 109

Automatic drive program ...............111

Changing gear ............................... 109

Display message ............................ 181

Double-clutch function .................. 109

Drive program display .................... 108

Driving tips .................................... 109

Emergency running mode .............. 114

Gliding mode ................................. 109

Kickdown ....................................... 109

Manual drive program .................... 111

Manual mode ................................. 112

Oil temperature (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 158

Overview ........................................ 106

Problem (malfunction) ................... 114

Pulling away ................................... 101

Rocking the vehicle free ................ 109

Starting the engine ........................ 101

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 110

Transmission position display ........ 108

Transmission positions .................. 108

Automatic transmission emer-

gency mode ....................................... 114

Back button ....................................... 197

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 54

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 64

Important safety notes .................... 63

Replacing ......................................... 64

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 242

Display message ............................ 175

Important safety notes .................. 241

Jump starting ................................. 243

Belt

see Seat belts

Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 156

Display message ............................ 177

Notes/function .............................. 143

Blootooth®

Connecting a different mobile

phone ............................................ 203

Bluetooth®

Searching for a mobile phone ........ 203

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Telephony ...................................... 202

Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 168

Notes ............................................. 279

Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 53

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 56

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .............................. 122

BAS .................................................. 54

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 279

Display message ............................ 163

EBD .................................................. 59

Hill start assist ............................... 101

Important safety notes .................. 121

Maintenance .................................. 122

Parking brake ................................ 118

Riding tips ...................................... 121

Warning lamp ................................. 187

Index 5

Breakdown

Where will I find...? ........................ 236

see Flat tire

see Towing away

Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 148

California

Important notice for retail cus-

tomers and lessees .......................... 23

Calling up a malfunction

see Display messages

Calling up the climate control bar

Multimedia system ........................ 200

Calling up the climate control

Multimedia system ........................ 200

Car

see Vehicle

Care

Car wash ........................................ 229

Carpets .......................................... 235

Display ........................................... 233

Exhaust pipe .................................. 233

Exterior lights ................................ 232

Gear or selector lever .................... 234

Interior ........................................... 233

Matte finish ................................... 231

Notes ............................................. 229

Paint .............................................. 231

Plastic trim .................................... 234

Power washer ................................ 230

Rear view camera .......................... 233

Roof lining ...................................... 235

Seat belt ........................................ 235

Seat cover ..................................... 234

Sensors ......................................... 232

Steering wheel ............................... 234

Trim pieces .................................... 234

Washing by hand ........................... 230

Wheels ........................................... 231

Windows ........................................ 232

Wiper blades .................................. 232

Wooden trim .................................. 234

Cargo compartment

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO ............ 69

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes .................. 206

Cargo net ........................................... 207

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 153

Center console

Overview .......................................... 33

Central locking

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 61

Changing the media source ............. 153

Charge retention

Socket ........................................... 119

Charge-air pressure (on-board

computer) .......................................... 158

Child

Restraint system .............................. 51

Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 52

On the front-passenger seat ............ 52

Rearward-facing restraint system .... 52

Children

Special seat belt retractor ............... 51

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes .................... 50

Cigarette lighter ................................ 210

Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 232

Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-

zone) ................................................ 92

Controlling automatically ................. 94

Cooling with air dehumidification ..... 93

Cooling with air dehumidification

(multimedia system) ...................... 200

Defrosting the windows ................... 95

Defrosting the windshield ................ 95

ECO start/stop function (3-zone

automatic climate control) ............... 93

General notes .................................. 92

Indicator lamp .................................. 94

Information about using auto-

matic climate control ....................... 93

Overview ........................................ 200

Overview of systems ........................ 92

6Index

Problem with the rear window

defroster .......................................... 96

Problems with cooling with air

dehumidification .............................. 94

Refrigerant .....................................280

Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 281

Setting the air distribution ...............94

Setting the air vents ........................ 96

Setting the airflow ........................... 95

Setting the climate mode (multi-

media system) ............................... 200

Setting the temperature .................. 94

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off .............................................. 96

Switching on/off .............................. 93

Switching the rear window

defroster on/off ............................... 95

Switching the synchronization

function on and off .......................... 95

Synchronization function (multi-

media system) ............................... 201

Climate control settings

Multimedia system ........................ 200

Climate control system

Climate control (3-zone automatic

climate control) ................................ 93

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 30

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

PLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 156

Display message ............................ 168

Operation/notes .............................. 54

COMAND display

Cleaning ......................................... 233

Combination switch ............................ 86

Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 150

Controller ........................................... 197

Convenience closing feature .............. 73

Convenience opening feature ............ 72

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 226

Display message ............................ 174

Filling capacity ............................... 280

Important safety notes .................. 279

Temperature display in the instru-

ment cluster .................................. 147

Warning lamp ................................. 191

Cooling

see Climate control

Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 173

Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 124

Deactivating ................................... 125

Display message ............................ 178

Driving system ............................... 124

Function/notes ............................. 124

Setting a speed .............................. 125

Storing and maintaining current

speed ............................................. 124

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 208

Important safety notes .................. 208

Customer Assistance Center

(CAC) ..................................................... 26

Customer Relations Department ....... 26

Data

see Technical data

Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 153

Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 173

Function/notes ................................ 85

Switching on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 157

Declarations of conformity ................. 25

Diagnostics connection ...................... 26

Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 21

Introduction ..................................... 21

Digital speedometer ......................... 150

Display

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 228

Index 7

Calling up (on-board computer) .....162

Driving systems .............................176

Engine ............................................ 174

General notes ................................ 161

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 162

Introduction ................................... 161

Lights ............................................. 173

Safety systems .............................. 163

SmartKey ....................................... 184

Tires ............................................... 179

Vehicle ...........................................181

Distance recorder .............................149

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 193

Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 55

DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 127

Activation conditions ..................... 127

Cruise control lever ....................... 127

Deactivating ................................... 130

Display message ............................ 178

Displays in the instrument cluster .. 131

Driving tips ....................................132

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 128

Function/notes .............................125

Important safety notes .................. 126

Setting a speed .............................. 130

Setting the specified minimum

distance ......................................... 130

Stopping ........................................ 129

Door control panel

Overview .......................................... 35

Doors

Automatic locking (switch) ...............68

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) .......................................61

Display message ............................ 183

Emergency locking ........................... 68

Emergency unlocking ....................... 68

Important safety notes .................... 67

Opening (from inside) ...................... 67

Drinking and driving ......................... 120

Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 111

Display ........................................... 108

Manual ........................................... 111

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 159

Driver's door

see Doors

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 229

Driving on flooded roads .................. 123

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 53

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 59

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 56

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 54

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

PLUS ................................................ 54

Distance warning function ............... 55

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution) ............................................. 59

ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) ............................................... 57

Important safety information ........... 53

Overview .......................................... 53

Driving systems

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ........................................... 135

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 142

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 143

Cruise control ................................ 124

Display message ............................ 176

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 125

HOLD function ............................... 133

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 145

Lane Tracking package .................. 143

PARKTRONIC ................................. 136

RACE START .................................. 134

Rear view camera .......................... 139

Driving tips

AMG high-performance and

ceramic brakes .............................. 122

Automatic transmission ................. 109

Brakes ........................................... 121

Break-in period ................................ 98

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 132

Downhill gradient ........................... 121

Drinking and driving ....................... 120

Driving in winter ............................. 123

Driving on flooded roads ................ 123

Driving on wet roads ...................... 123

Exhaust check ............................... 120

Fuel ................................................ 120

General .......................................... 120

8Index

Hydroplaning ................................. 123

Icy road surfaces ........................... 123

Limited braking efficiency on sal-

ted roads ....................................... 121

Snow chains .................................. 252

Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 121

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 98

Wet road surface ........................... 121

DVD video

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 154

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............ 105

E-SELECT lever ................................... 106

EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ................................ 80

EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ................................ 80

EBD (electronic brake force distri-

bution)

Display message ............................ 165

Function/notes ................................ 59

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine switch-off .......... 102

Deactivating/activating ................. 103

General information ....................... 102

Important safety notes .................. 102

Introduction ................................... 102

Electronic Stability Program

see ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 50

Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 68

Vehicle ............................................. 68

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation ......................................... 48

Emergency unlocking

Tailgate ............................................ 71

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 23

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ........... 191

Display message ............................ 174

ECO start/stop function ................ 102

Engine number ............................... 276

Irregular running ............................ 104

Jump-starting ................................. 243

Starting problems .......................... 104

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 101

Starting with the Start/Stop but-

ton ................................................. 101

Switching off .................................. 117

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 247

Engine electronics

Notes ............................................. 274

Problem (malfunction) ................... 104

Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 226

Additives ........................................ 279

Checking the oil level ..................... 224

Checking the oil level using the

dipstick .......................................... 224

Checking the oil level using the

on-board computer ........................ 225

Display message ............................ 175

Filling capacity ............................... 279

Notes about oil grades ................... 278

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 224

Temperature (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 158

Entering an address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

ESP®(Electronic Stability Pro-

gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 159

Characteristics ................................. 57

Deactivating/activating ................... 58

Display message ............................ 163

Function/notes ................................ 57

General notes .................................. 57

Important safety information ........... 57

Warning lamp ................................. 188

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-

tem) ...................................................... 57

Exhaust check ................................... 120

Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 233

Index 9

Exterior lighting

Cleaning .........................................232

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ......................................... 81

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 82

Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 82

Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 81

Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 82

Setting ............................................. 82

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ................................................. 84

Storing the parking position ............. 82

Favorites

Overview ........................................ 199

Features ............................................. 208

Filler cap

see Refueling

Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the

spare wheel ................................... 268

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 237

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 238

Floormats ........................................... 222

Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 274

Two-way radio ................................ 274

Fuel

Additives ........................................ 278

Consumption statistics .................. 150

Displaying the current consump-

tion ................................................ 149

Displaying the range ...................... 149

Driving tips .................................... 120

E10 ................................................ 277

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 277

Important safety notes .................. 277

Problem (malfunction) ................... 116

Refueling ........................................ 114

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 277

Fuel filler flap

Closing ........................................... 115

General information ....................... 115

Opening ......................................... 115

Problem (malfunction) ................... 116

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board

computer) ...................................... 149

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 277

Problem (malfunction) ................... 116

Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 249

Before changing ............................. 248

Fuse box in the cargo compart-

ment .............................................. 249

Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell .......................................... 248

Important safety notes .................. 248

G-Meter (on-board computer) .......... 159

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 222

General notes ................................ 219

Important safety notes .................. 219

Opening/closing the garage door..221

Problems when programming ........221

Programming (button in the rear-

view mirror) ................................... 220

Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 220

Gasoline ............................................. 277

Gear indicator (on-board com-

puter) ..................................................158

Genuine parts ...................................... 22

Glove box ...........................................206

Google™ Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Handbrake

see Parking brake

Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function

on/off ............................................ 199

Touchpad ....................................... 198

Hazard warning lamps ........................ 87

Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 77

10 Index

Headlamps

Cleaning system (notes) ................280

Fogging up ....................................... 88

see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating

see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................... 86

High-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 173

Switching on/off .............................. 86

Hill start assist .................................. 101

HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 133

Deactivating ................................... 134

Display message ............................ 177

Function/notes .............................133

Home address

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Hood

Closing ...........................................224

Display message ............................ 183

Important safety notes .................. 223

Opening ......................................... 223

Horn ...................................................... 30

Hydroplaning ..................................... 123

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 59

Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

PLUS .............................................. 193

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators

see Turn signals

Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 31

Warning and indicator lamps ........... 31

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 157

Interior lighting

Automatic control ............................ 89

General notes .................................. 88

Overview .......................................... 88

Reading lamp ................................... 88

Setting the brightness of the dis-

play/switch (on-board computer) .. 157

iPod®

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Jack

Using ............................................. 269

Jump starting (engine) ......................243

Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 100

Start/Stop button ............................ 99

KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 73

Deactivation ..................................... 62

Locking ............................................ 62

Start function ................................... 62

Unlocking ......................................... 62

KEYLESS-GO start function

Start/Stop button ............................ 99

Kickdown

Driving tips ....................................109

Knee bag .............................................. 42

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-

board computer) ............................ 157

Display message ............................ 177

Function/information .................... 145

Lane Tracking package ..................... 143

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 160

License plate lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 173

Light sensor (display message) ....... 173

Lights

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 85

Fogged up headlamps ...................... 88

Hazard warning lamps ..................... 87

High beam flasher ............................ 86

High-beam headlamps ..................... 86

Index 11

Light switch .....................................85

Low-beam headlamps ...................... 86

Parking lamps .................................. 86

Rear fog lamp .................................. 86

Setting exterior lighting ................... 85

Setting the brightness of the dis-

play/switch (on-board computer) .. 157

Standing lamps ................................ 86

Switching the daytime running

lamps on/off (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 157

Turn signals ..................................... 86

see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 205

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 68

Emergency locking ........................... 68

From inside (central locking but-

ton) .................................................. 67

see KEYLESS-GO

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 173

Switching on/off .............................. 86

M button ............................................. 110

M+S tires ............................................ 252

Malfunction message

see Display messages

Manual mode ..................................... 112

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 231

mbrace

Call priority .................................... 214

Display message ............................ 168

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 214

Downloading routes ....................... 217

Emergency call .............................. 212

General notes ................................ 211

Geo fencing ................................... 217

Info call button .............................. 213

Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 216

Remote fault diagnosis .................. 216

Remote vehicle locking .................. 215

Roadside assistance button ........... 213

Search & Send ............................... 215

Self-test ......................................... 211

Speed alert .................................... 217

System .......................................... 211

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 217

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 215

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 63

General notes .................................. 63

Inserting .......................................... 63

Locking vehicle ................................ 68

Removing ......................................... 63

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 68

Media Interface

see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 153

Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior

mirrors ............................................. 83

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 125

Message memory (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 162

Messages

see Display messages

see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 232

Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors

see Vanity mirror

Mobile phone

Connecting (Bluetooth®inter-

face) .............................................. 202

Connecting another mobile

phone ............................................ 203

Frequencies ................................... 274

Installation ..................................... 274

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 154

Transmission output (maximum) .... 274

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ........................................... 63

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 272

Mounting a new wheel ................... 271

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 269

12 Index

Raisingthevehicle.........................269

Removing a wheel .......................... 271

Securing the vehicle against roll-

ing away ........................................ 269

MP3

Operation ....................................... 153

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Multifunction display

Function/notes .............................149

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer .. 148

Overview .......................................... 32

Multimedia system

Switching on and off ......................197

Music files

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Navigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 150

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-

cle .........................................................98

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 43

Faults ............................................... 47

Operation ......................................... 44

System self-test ...............................46

Occupant safety

Air bags ...........................................41

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent ................................................. 50

Children in the vehicle ..................... 50

Important safety notes .................... 36

Introduction to the restraint sys-

tem .................................................. 36

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 43

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator

lamps ............................................... 37

Pets in the vehicle ........................... 53

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occu-

pant protection) ............................... 49

Restraint system warning lamp ........ 37

Seat belt .......................................... 37

OCS

Conditions ....................................... 43

Faults ............................................... 47

Operation ......................................... 44

System self-test ............................... 46

Odometer ........................................... 149

Oil

see Engine oil

On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 158

Assistance graphic menu ............... 155

Assistance menu ........................... 156

Display messages .......................... 161

Displaying a service message ........ 228

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 131

Factory settings ............................. 158

G-Meter ......................................... 159

Important safety notes .................. 147

Instrument cluster menu ............... 157

Lights menu ................................... 157

Media menu ................................... 153

Menu overview .............................. 149

Message memory .......................... 162

Navigation menu ............................ 150

Operation ....................................... 148

RACETIMER ................................... 160

Radio menu ................................... 152

Service menu ................................. 156

Settings menu ............................... 156

Standard display ............................ 149

Telephone menu ............................ 154

Trip menu ...................................... 149

Video DVD operation ..................... 154

Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 25

Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating system

see On-board computer

Operation

Digital Operator's Manual ................ 21

Operator's Manual

Overview .......................................... 23

Vehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 147

Index 13

Overhead control panel ......................34

Paddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters

Paint code number ............................275

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 231

Panic alarm .......................................... 36

Panorama roof ..................................... 74

Parking

Important safety notes .................. 116

Parking brake ................................ 118

Position of exterior mirror, front-

passenger side ................................. 82

Rear view camera .......................... 139

Switching off the engine ................ 117

see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

see Exterior mirrors

see PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Applying automatically ................... 118

Applying or releasing manually ...... 118

Display message ............................ 165

Electric parking brake .................... 118

Emergency braking ........................ 119

General notes ................................ 118

Releasing automatically ................. 119

Warning lamp ................................. 190

Parking lamps

Switching on/off .............................. 86

PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 138

Driving system ............................... 136

Function/notes .............................136

Important safety notes .................. 136

Problem (malfunction) ................... 138

Range of the sensors ..................... 137

Warning display ............................. 137

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Display message ............................ 171

Indicator lamps ................................ 37

Problems (malfunction) .................. 171

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 53

Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 234

Power washers .................................. 230

Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant

protection)

Display message ............................ 169

Operation ......................................... 49

Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 60

Immobilizer ...................................... 59

Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 22

Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 101

General notes ................................ 101

Hill start assist ............................... 101

QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1

Rescue card ..................................... 27

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26

Quick access for audio and tele-

phone

Changing the station/music

track .............................................. 199

RACE START

Activating ....................................... 135

Important safety notes .................. 134

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 160

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 152

Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Radio-wave reception/transmis-

sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 25

Reading lamp ....................................... 88

Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 173

Switching on/off .............................. 86

14 Index

Rear lamps

see Lights

Rear spoiler

Display message ............................ 183

Extending/retracting ..................... 218

Problem ......................................... 219

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 233

Function/notes ............................. 139

Switching on/off ........................... 139

Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96

Switching on/off .............................. 96

Rear-view mirror

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 82

Reflective safety jacket .................... 236

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem)

Important safety notes .................. 280

Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31

Important safety notes .................. 114

Refueling process .......................... 115

see Fuel

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 219

Programming (garage door

opener) .......................................... 220

Replacing bulbs

General notes .................................. 89

Reporting safety defects .................... 26

Rescue card ......................................... 27

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 176

Warning lamp ................................. 191

Restraint system

Display message ............................ 169

Introduction ..................................... 36

Warning lamp ................................. 190

Warning lamp (function) ................... 37

Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 71

Reversing lamps (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 173

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24

Roller sunblind for the panorama

roof

Opening and closing ........................ 74

Operating ......................................... 74

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 235

Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 50

see Occupant safety

see Operating safety

Safety system

see Driving safety systems

SD card

Inserting/removing ........................ 204

SD memory card

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Selecting ........................................ 153

Search & Send

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Seat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front-

passenger seat belt ......................... 40

Cleaning ......................................... 235

Correct usage .................................. 39

Fastening ......................................... 40

Important safety guidelines ............. 38

Introduction ..................................... 37

Releasing ......................................... 40

Warning lamp ................................. 186

Warning lamp (function) ................... 40

Seats

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 77

Adjusting (manually) ........................ 76

Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 78

Adjusting lumbar support ................ 77

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 77

Cleaning the cover ......................... 234

Correct driver's seat position ........... 75

Important safety notes .................... 75

Seat heating problem ...................... 79

Index 15

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ................................................. 84

Switching seat heating on/off ......... 78

Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 234

Positions ........................................ 106

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 232

Service menu (on-board com-

puter) .................................................. 156

Service message

see ASSYST PLUS

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 279

Coolant (engine) ............................ 279

Engine oil ....................................... 278

Fuel ................................................ 276

Important safety notes .................. 276

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-

tem) ............................................... 280

Washer fluid ................................... 280

Setting the date/time format

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Setting the language

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Setting the time

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 158

On-board computer ....................... 156

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 159

Side impact air bag ............................. 42

Side marker lamp (display mes-

sage) ................................................... 173

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 232

Convenience closing feature ............ 73

Convenience opening feature .......... 72

Important safety information ........... 71

Opening/closing .............................. 72

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 74

Resetting ......................................... 73

Reversing feature ............................. 71

SIRIUS services

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 64

Changing the programming ............. 63

Checking the battery ....................... 64

Convenience closing feature ............ 73

Convenience opening feature .......... 72

Display message ............................ 184

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 61

Important safety notes .................... 61

KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 62

Loss ................................................. 65

Mechanical key ................................ 63

Overview .......................................... 61

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 100

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 65

Starting the engine ........................ 101

SMS

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Snow chains ...................................... 252

Sockets

General notes ................................ 210

Luggage compartment ................... 211

Sound

Switching on/off ........................... 197

Special seat belt retractor .................. 51

Specialist workshop ............................ 26

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-

tional speedometer ........................ 158

Digital ............................................ 150

Segments ...................................... 147

Selecting the display unit ............... 158

SPEEDTRONIC

Display message ............................ 178

SPORT handling mode

Activating/deactivating ................... 58

Warning lamp ................................. 190

Sports exhaust system

see AMG sports exhaust system

Standing lamps

Display message ............................ 173

Switching on/off .............................. 86

16 Index

Start/Stop button

General notes ..................................99

Key positions ................................... 99

Starting the engine ........................ 101

Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 100

Steering

Display message ............................ 184

Warning lamps ............................... 195

Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 80

Button overview ............................... 32

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 148

Cleaning ......................................... 234

EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............... 80

Important safety notes .................... 79

Paddle shifters ............................... 110

Storing settings (memory func-

tion) ................................................. 84

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 110

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 160

Stowage areas ................................... 205

Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 206

Armrest (under) ............................. 206

Cup holders ................................... 208

Glove box ....................................... 206

Important safety information ......... 205

Stowage net ................................... 206

Stowage net ....................................... 206

Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 252

Sun visor ............................................ 208

Suspension setting

AMG adaptive sport suspension

system ........................................... 135

Suspension settings

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 159

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ................................................... 96

Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 204

Tachometer ........................................ 147

Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 173

see Lights

Tailgate

Display message ............................ 183

Emergency unlocking ....................... 71

Important safety notes .................... 69

Opening (automatically from

inside) .............................................. 70

Opening dimensions ...................... 281

Opening/closing .............................. 69

Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 69

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO ............ 69

Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 276

Information .................................... 274

Tires/wheels ................................. 272

Vehicle data ................................... 281

Telephone

Accepting a call (multifunction

steering wheel) .............................. 155

Authorizing a mobile phone (con-

necting) ......................................... 203

Connecting a mobile phone (gen-

eral information) ............................ 202

Display message ............................ 184

Introduction ................................... 154

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 154

Number from the phone book ........ 155

Redialing ........................................ 155

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 155

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Switching between mobile

phones ........................................... 203

Temperature

Coolant (display in the instrument

cluster) .......................................... 147

Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 158

Outside temperature ...................... 147

Setting (climate control) .................. 94

Transmission oil (on-board com-

puter) ............................................. 158

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 160

Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 256

Index 17

Checking manually ........................ 256

Display message ............................ 179

Maximum .......................................255

Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 240

Notes ............................................. 254

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 240

Recommended ............................... 253

Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure elec-

tronically ........................................ 257

Function/notes .............................256

General notes ................................ 256

Important safety notes .................. 256

Restarting ...................................... 258

Warning lamp ................................. 194

Warning message .......................... 258

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 237

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 238

Important safety notes .................. 238

Storage location ............................ 237

Tire pressure not reached .............. 240

Tire pressure reached .................... 240

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 267

Average weight of the vehicle

occupants (definition) .................... 266

Bar (definition) ............................... 266

Changing a wheel .......................... 268

Characteristics .............................. 266

Checking ........................................ 251

Curb weight (definition) ................. 267

Definition of terms ......................... 266

Direction of rotation ...................... 268

Display message ............................ 179

Distribution of the vehicle occu-

pants (definition) ............................ 268

DOT (Department of Transporta-

tion) (definition) ............................. 266

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 265

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) ..................................... 266

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-

inition) ........................................... 267

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) (definition) .............................. 267

Important safety notes .................. 250

Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment (definition) ...... 266

Information on driving .................... 250

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 267

Labeling (overview) ........................ 263

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 268

Load index ..................................... 265

Load index (definition) ................... 267

Maximum load on a tire (defini-

tion) ............................................... 267

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 267

Maximum permissible tire pres-

sure (definition) ............................. 267

Maximum tire load ......................... 265

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 267

Optional equipment weight (defi-

nition) ............................................ 268

PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-

inition) ........................................... 267

Replacing ....................................... 268

Service life ..................................... 251

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 267

Speed rating (definition) ................ 267

Storing ........................................... 269

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 266

Summer tires in winter .................. 252

Temperature .................................. 262

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 268

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 267

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 267

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 266

Tire size (data) ............................... 272

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity, speed rating .................... 263

Tire tread ....................................... 251

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 267

Total load limit (definition) ............. 268

Traction ......................................... 262

Traction (definition) ....................... 268

Tread wear ..................................... 262

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 261

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (definition) .................... 266

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 268

18 Index

Wheel and tire combination ........... 272

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 266

see Flat tire

Touchpad

Changing the station/music

track ..............................................199

Character suggestions ................... 198

Deleting characters ....................... 198

Entering a space ............................ 198

Entering characters ....................... 198

Gesture control .............................. 198

Handwriting recognition ................ 198

Operating the touchpad ................. 198

Overview ........................................ 198

Quick access for Audio .................. 199

Switching ....................................... 198

Switching input line ....................... 198

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 247

Towing away

Important safety guidelines ........... 245

Installing the towing eye ................ 246

Removing the towing eye ...............246

Transporting the vehicle ................ 247

With both axles on the ground ....... 247

Towing eye ......................................... 236

Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual ..................................................196

Transmission

Driving tips ....................................109

Selector lever ................................ 106

see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 108

Transmission positions .................... 108

Transporting the vehicle .................. 247

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-

tions) ..................................................234

Trip computer (on-board com-

puter) ..................................................150

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 149

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 150

Trunk load (maximum) ......................281

Trunk partition .................................. 206

Turn signals

Display message ............................ 173

Switching on/off .............................. 86

Two-way radio

Frequencies ................................... 274

Installation ..................................... 274

Transmission output (maximum) .... 274

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 68

From inside the vehicle (central

unlocking button) .............................67

USB devices

Connecting to the Media Inter-

face ...............................................204

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........209

Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 26

Data acquisition ............................... 27

Display message ............................ 181

Electronics ..................................... 274

Equipment ....................................... 23

Individual settings .......................... 156

Limited Warranty .............................27

Loading .......................................... 259

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 68

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 61

Lowering ........................................ 272

Maintenance .................................... 24

Operating safety .............................. 25

Parking .......................................... 116

Parking for a long period ................ 119

Pulling away ................................... 101

Raising ........................................... 269

Reporting problems ......................... 26

Securing from rolling away ............ 269

Towing away .................................. 245

Transporting .................................. 247

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 68

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 61

Vehicle data ................................... 281

Vehicle data

Trunk load (maximum) ................... 281

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 281

Index 19

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 68

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 275

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 236

Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 154

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

VIN

Seat ............................................... 276

Type plate ...................................... 275

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 188

Brakes ........................................... 187

Check Engine ................................. 191

Coolant .......................................... 191

Distance warning ........................... 193

ESP®.............................................. 188

ESP®OFF ....................................... 189

Fuel tank ........................................ 191

Overview .......................................... 31

Parking brake ................................ 190

PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 37

Reserve fuel ................................... 191

Restraint system ............................ 190

Seat belt ........................................ 186

SPORT handling mode ................... 190

Steering ......................................... 195

Tire pressure monitor .................... 194

Warranty .............................................. 23

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 184

Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man-

ual .................................................. 196

Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 272

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 272

Wheel chock ...................................... 269

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 268

Checking ........................................ 251

Cleaning ......................................... 231

Important safety notes .................. 250

Information on driving .................... 250

Interchanging/changing ................ 268

Mounting a new wheel ................... 271

Mounting a wheel .......................... 269

Removing a wheel .......................... 271

Storing ........................................... 269

Tightening torque ........................... 272

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 272

Window curtain air bag

Display message ............................ 170

Operation ......................................... 43

Windows

see Side windows

Windshield

Defrosting ........................................ 95

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 227

Important safety notes .................. 280

Windshield wipers

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91

Replacing the wiper blades .............. 90

Switching on/off .............................. 89

Winter driving

Important safety notes .................. 252

Slippery road surfaces ................... 123

Snow chains .................................. 252

Winter operation

Summer tires ................................. 252

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 252

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 232

Important safety notes .................... 90

Replacing ......................................... 90

Replacing (windshield) ..................... 90

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-

tions) .................................................. 234

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

20 Index

Introduction

The printedOperator's Manual providesinfor-

mation about thesafeoperation of your vehicle.

The Digital Operator's Manual providescompre-

hensiveand specifically adapted information on

your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia sys-

tem. You can call up theDigital Operator's Man-

ual via themultimedia system.

iYou will notincur any costswhen calling up

theDigital Operator's Manual. The Digital

Operator's Manual works without connecting

to theInternet.

Thereare three ways to access thetopicsof the

Digital Operator's Manual:

RVisualsearch

The visual search allows you to exploreyour

vehicle"virtually". Starting from either the

vehicleexteriorviewor interiorview, you can

access manyof thedifferenttopicscovered

by theDigital Operator's Manual. To access

thevehicleinteriorsection,select the"Vehi-

cle interior" view.

RKeywordsearch

The keyword search allows you to search for a

keyword by enteringcharacters. Further

information can be foundin theDigital Oper-

ator's Manual in the"COMAND"section

under the"Character entry(telephony)" key-

word.

RContents

You can select individual sectionsin thecon-

tents.

iThe Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-

tedfor safetyreasonswhile driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

XShow themain function bar by sliding the

controller upwards 5.

XSelecttheVehiclemenuitem by turning

3and pressing7thecontroller.

The vehiclemenuis displayed.

XSelecttheOperator'sManual menuitem by

turning3and pressing7thecontroller.

XConfirm7themessage about thewarning

and safetynotes.

The basic menufor theDigital Operator's

Manual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual

General notes

Pleaseobservetheinformation about theoper-

ation of thecontroller (Ypage 197).

Content pages

The contentpages can be accessed by meansof

avisual search, a keyword search or usingthe

contents.

XTo scroll forwards/backwards: turn3

thecontroller.

XTo displayin full-screen or animation: slide

8thecontroller to theleft:.

XTo select information texts or savebook-

marks: slide 9thecontroller to the

right ;.

XTo select alink:slide 6thecontroller

downwards =.

XTo exit acontent page: select %sym-

bol ?.

XTo call up thebasic menuof theDigital

Operator's Manual: select Þsymbol A.

XTo switch functions to themultimedia

system:select %symbol ?repeatedly

until you exit theDigital Operator's Manual.

Digital Operator's Manual 21

Protecting the environment

General notes

HEnvironmental note

Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-

hensive environmental protection.

The objectives are for the natural resources

that form the basis of our existence on this

planet to be used sparingly and in a manner

that takes the requirements of both nature

and humanity into account.

You too can help to protect the environment

by operating your vehicle in an environmen-

tally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,

transmission, brake and tire wear are affected

by these factors:

Roperating conditions of your vehicle

Ryour personal driving style

You can influence both factors. You should

bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-

sumption.

Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.

Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.

Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.

Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You should

therefore adhere to the service intervals.

Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.

Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and

braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ôof its maximum engine speed.

Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-

tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-

mendations

Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to

dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-

use them. Observe the relevant environmental

rules and regulations when disposing of materi-

als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-

ronment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

HEnvironmental note

Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major

assemblies and parts which are of the same

quality as new parts. They are covered by the

same Limited Warranty entitlements as new

parts.

!Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-

ces, as well as control units and sensors for

these restraint systems, may be installed in

the following areas of your vehicle:

Rdoors

Rdoor pillars

Rdoor sills

Rseats

Rcockpit

Rinstrument cluster

Rcenter console

Do not install accessories such as audio sys-

tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs

or welding. You could impair the operating

efficiency of the restraint systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at a

qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of

your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as

well as accessories relevant to safety which

have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This

could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

22 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Introduction

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-

ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-

ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that

have been specifically approved for your vehi-

cle.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to

strict quality control. Every part has been spe-

cifically developed, manufactured or selected

for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

should be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain

a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for

necessary service and repair work. In addition,

strategically located parts delivery centers pro-

vide quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz

parts (Ypage 275).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment

iThis Operator's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of

your vehicle available at the time of this Oper-

ator's Manual going to print. Country-specific

differences are possible. Bear in mind that

your vehicle may not feature all functions

described here. This also applies to safety-

relevant systems and functions. The equip-

ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from

that shown in the descriptions and illustra-

tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-

tems installed in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning

equipment and operation, please consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-

let are important documents and should be kept

in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty

The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

accordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Information

booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

replace and repair all factory-installed parts in

accordance with the following warranty terms

and conditions:

RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty

REmission Performance Warranty

RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-

setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island

and Vermont Emission Control System War-

ranty

RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered

by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories

warranties. These are available at any author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

iShould you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-

ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-

mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-

nia

Under California law you may be entitled to a

replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the

purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-

able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service

facilities fail to fix one or more substantial

defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are

covered by its express warranty.

During the period of 18 months from original

delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the

odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,

a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-

sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more

of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to cause

Service and vehicle operation 23

Introduction

death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is

driven, that defect or malfunction has been

subject to repair two or more times, and you

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,

LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction

of a less serious nature than category (1)

has been subject to repair four or more

times and you have directly notified

Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its

repair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of

repair of the same or different substantial

defects or malfunctions for a cumulative

total of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance

The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all

the necessary maintenance work which should

be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet

with you when you bring the vehicle to an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service

advisor will record every service for you in the

Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-

gram offers technical help in the event of a

breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-

tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24

hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100(Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program

brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"

section in the Service and Warranty Booklet

(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-

ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-

ership

In the event of a change of address, please send

us the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-

ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-

ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the

next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send us

the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

(USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA

and Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe

the following points:

RService facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.

RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuel

can cause damage to the catalytic converter.

RThe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause

engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for

delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-

ery Program. For details, consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the

following addresses.

In the USA

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

24 Service and vehicle operation

Introduction

Operating safety

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions or

system failures. There is a risk of an accident.

Always have the prescribed service/mainte-

nance work as well as any required repairs

carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk

of fire.

When driving off road or on unpaved roads,

check the vehicle's underside regularly. In

particular, remove parts of plants or other

flammable materials which have become

trapped. In the case of damage, contact a

qualified specialist workshop.

GWARNING

Modifications to electronic components, their

software as well as wiring can impair their

function and/or the function of other net-

worked components. In particular, systems

relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

result, these may no longer function as inten-

ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of

the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an

accident and injury.

Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-

tronic components or their software. You

should have all work to electrical and elec-

tronic equipment carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

!There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high

curb or an unpaved road

Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road

Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or

parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-

body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be

damaged without the damage being visible.

Components damaged in this way can unex-

pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no

longer withstand the loads they are designed

to.

If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-

bustible materials such as leaves, grass or

twigs can gather between the underbody and

the underbody paneling. If these materials

come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust

system, they can catch fire.

In such situations, have the vehicle checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-

ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,

pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,

paying attention to road and traffic condi-

tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive

and/or transmit radio waves

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-

ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: 1) These

devices may not cause harmful interference,

and 2) These devices must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation. Changes or modifi-

cations not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle

comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may

not cause interference, and (2) These devices

must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of

the device."

Operating safety 25

Introduction

Diagnostics connection

The diagnosticsconnection is only intended for

theconnection of diagnostic equipmentat a

qualified specialistworkshop.

GWARNING

If you connectequipmentto adiagnostics

connection in thevehicle, it may affectthe

operation of vehicle systems.As aresult,the

operatingsafetyof thevehicle could be affec-

ted. There is ariskof an accident.

Only connectequipmentto adiagnosticscon-

nection in thevehicle, whichis approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

GWARNING

Objects in thedriver's footwell can restrictthe

pedaltravelor obstruct adepressed pedal.

The operatingand road safetyof thevehicle is

jeopardized. There is ariskof an accident.

Makesurethat all objects in thevehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannotenter

thedriver's footwell. Install thefloormats

securely and as specifiedin order to ensure

sufficientclearanceforthepedals. Do notuse

loose floormatsand do notplacefloormatson

topof oneanother.

!If theengineis switched offand equipment

on thediagnosticsconnection is used,the

starter battery may discharge.

Connectingequipmentto thediagnosticscon-

nection can lead to emissionsmonitoringinfor-

mation beingreset,forexample. Thismay lead

to thevehicle failingto meettherequirements of

thenext emissionstest duringthemain inspec-

tion.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-BenzCenteris aquali-

fiedspecialistworkshop.It has thenecessary

specialistknowledge,tools and qualificationsto

correctlycarry out theworkrequiredon your

vehicle. Thisis especially thecaseforworkrel-

evant to safety.

Observethenotesin theMaintenance Booklet.

Always havethefollowingworkcarriedout at an

authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter:

Rworkrelevant to safety

Rserviceand maintenance work

Rrepair work

Ralterations, installation workand modifica-

tions

Rworkon electronic components

Correct use

If you removeany warningstickers,you or oth-

ers could fail to recognizecertain dangers.

Leave warningstickers in position.

Observethefollowinginformation when driving

your vehicle:

Rthesafetynotesin this manual

Rthevehicle technical data

Rtraffic rulesand regulations

Rlaws and safetystandardspertainingto motor

vehicles

Problemswithyourvehicle

If you should experience aproblem withyour

vehicle, particularly onethat you believe may

affectitssafeoperation,we urgeyou to contact

an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenterimmedi-

ately to havetheproblem diagnosed and recti-

fied. If theproblem is notresolved to your sat-

isfaction,please discusstheproblem again with

theauthorized Mercedes-BenzCenteror,if nec-

essary, contact us at oneof thefollowing

addresses.

In theUSA

Customer AssistanceCenter

Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC

OneMercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Customer RelationsDepartment

Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc.

98 VanderhoofAvenue

Toronto,Ontario M4G4C9

Reporting safetydefects

USAonly:

26 Operating safety

Introduction

The following text is published as required of

manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-

eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of

1966".

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order

a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz

USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety at:

http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty

!Follow the instructions in this manual about

the proper operation of your vehicle as well as

about possible vehicle damage. Damage to

your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-

ventions against these instructions is not cov-

ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-

ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap

and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the

event of an accident, rescue services can use

the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-

cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue

card contains the most important information

about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the

routing of the electric cables.

You can find more information under

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storage

A wide range of electronic components in your

vehicle contain data memories.

These data memories temporarily or perma-

nently store technical information about:

Rthe vehicle's operating state

Rincidents

Rmalfunctions

In general, this technical information docu-

ments the state of a component, a module, a

system or the surroundings.

These include, for example:

Roperating conditions of system components,

e.g. fluid levels

Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its

individual components, e.g. number of wheel

revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-

ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal

position

Rmalfunctions and defects in important system

components, e.g. lights, brakes

Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in

special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-

ment, intervention of stability control sys-

tems

Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature

This data is of an exclusively technical nature

and can be used to:

Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-

tions and defects

Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-

dent

Roptimize vehicle functions

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's

movements.

When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-

mation can be read from the event data memory

and malfunction data memory.

Services include, for example:

Rrepair services

Rservice processes

Rwarranties

Rquality assurance

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-

vice network (including the manufacturer) using

special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-

mation is obtained from it, if required.

Data stored in the vehicle 27

Introduction

After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-

mation is deleted from the malfunction memory

or is continually overwritten.

When operating the vehicle, situations are con-

ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

tion with other information (if necessary, under

consultation with an authorized expert), could

be traced to a person.

Examples include:

Raccident reports

Rdamage to the vehicle

Rwitness statements

Further additional functions that have been con-

tractually agreed upon with the customer allow

certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-

cle as well. The additional functions include, for

example, vehicle location in case of an emer-

gency.

COMAND/mbrace

If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or

mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's

operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-

uations, and the location of the vehicle may be

compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-

tem.

For additional information please refer to the

COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-

tions.

Event data recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-

ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

RHow various systems in your vehicle were

operating

RWhether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened

RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal and

RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-

tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data rou-

tinely acquired during a crash investigation.

Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed

to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and

special equipment is required. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have

the special equipment, such as law enforce-

ment, can read the information by accessing the

vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-

ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-

dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash

Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract

data from the EDR is commercially available,

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly

disclaims any and all liability arising from the

extraction of this information by unauthorized

Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others

without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if

the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the

lessee. Exceptions to this representation

include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-

ment; by federal, state or local government; in

connection with or arising out of litigation involv-

ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,

as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the

Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-

ing, modifying or removing the EDR component

may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-

tem Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

This means that in the event of such conflict, the

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

28 Data stored in the vehicle

Introduction

Information on copyright

Free and open-source software

Information on license for free and open-source

software used in your vehiclecan be foundon

thedatacarrierin your vehicledocumentwallet

and,includingupdates, on thefollowingweb-

site:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Information on copyright 29

Introduction

Cockpit

Function Page

:Combination switch 86

;Steering wheel paddle shift-

ers 110

=Instrument cluster 31

?Overhead control panel 34

AClimate control systems 93

BHorn

CAdjusts the steering wheel

electrically 80

Function Page

DCruise control lever 124

EUnlocks the tailgate 70

FElectric parking brake 118

GDiagnostics connection 26

HOpens the hood 223

IRear fog lamp 86

JLight switch 85

30 Cockpit

At a glance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

:Speedometer

Speedometer segments 147

Warning and indicator lamps:

hTirepressuremonitor 194

åESP®OFF188

÷ESP®188

·Distancewarning 193

ÐPowersteering 195

6Restraintsystem 37

üSeat belts186

KHigh-beam headlamps 86

LLow-beam headlamps 86

TParking lamps86

NThis lamp has no func-

tion

RRear fog lamp 86

;#! Turn signals 86

=Multifunction display 149

?Tachometer 147

Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps:

!Electric parking brake

(yellow) 190

!ABS188

;CheckEngine191

Electric parking brake(red) 190

FUSAonly

!Canadaonly

Brakes(red) 187

$USAonly

JCanadaonly

MSPORT handlingmode190

ACoolanttemperature display 147

Warning and indicator lamps:

?Coolant191

BFuellevel indicator

Warning and indicator lamps:

8Reserve fuel level with

fuel filler flap location indica-

tor(right)191

iInformation on thedisplay of theoutside

temperature in themultifunction display can

be foundunder "Outside temperature dis-

play" (Ypage 147).

Adjusting theinstrumentclusterlighting

usingtheon-board computer (Ypage 157).

Instrument cluster 31

At a glance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

:Multifunction display 149

;Multimedia system display

=~Rejects or ends a call

6Makes or accepts a call

Further telephone functions 154

WXAdjusts volume

8Mute

óSwitches on the Voice

Control System

Function Page

?òOpens the menu list

9:Selects a menu

aConfirms the selection

%Back

Operates the on-board com-

puter 148

ñSwitches off the Voice

Control System

iIn vehicles with multimedia system

COMAND you can find further information:

Ron the multimedia system in the Digital

Operator's Manual

Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in

the Digital Operator's Manual

Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-

rate operating instructions

32 Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

Center console

Function Page

:Stowage compartment 206

12 V socket 210

Cigarette lighter 210

Ashtray 209

;Switches the multimedia sys-

tem on/off (see the Digital

Operator's Manual)

=M button (activates manual

mode) 110

?èECO button (start/stop

function) incl. indicator lamp 103

AAdjusts the exhaust flap of

the AMG sports exhaust sys-

tem 103

BIgnition lock (in the stowage

compartment) 100

CStowage compartment 206

Function Page

DAMG E-SELECT selector lever 106

EAdjusts AMG adaptive sport

suspension system 135

FButton for gear P106

GActivates/deactivates ESP®58

Activates/deactivates

SPORT handling mode 58

HTouchpad; see Digital Opera-

tor's Manual

IStart/Stop button 99

JMultimedia system control-

ler; see Digital Operator's

Manual

KSelects the drive program

(DYNAMIC SELECT control-

ler) 105

Center console 33

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

:cSeat heating 78

;Extends/retracts rear

spoiler 218

=£Hazard warning lamps 87

?PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-

tor lamp 37

ATA indicator lamp 60

AcPARKTRONIC 136

B|Switches the automatic

interior lighting control

on/off 89

CpSwitches the right-

hand reading lamp on/off 88

DïInfo call button

(mbrace system) 213

Function Page

ERear-view mirror 82

FTransmitter buttons for the

garage door opener 220

GGSOS button (mbrace

system) 212

HFRoadside Assistance

call button (mbrace system) 213

IpSwitches the left-hand

reading lamp on/off 88

JcSwitches the interior

lighting on/off

KuSwitches the cargo

compartment lamp on/off 89

34 Overhead control panel

At a glance

Door controlpanel

Function Page

:Opens thedoor67

;&%Locks/unlocks

the vehicle 67

=ZSelects the left exterior

mirror 81

?ªFolds the exterior mir-

rors in/out electrically 81

Function Page

A\Selects the right exte-

rior mirror 81

B7Adjusts the exterior

mirrors 81

CWOpens/closes the side

windows 72

Door control panel 35

At a glance

Panic alarm

XTo activate: press !button :for at least

one second.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed.

XTo deactivate: press !button :again.

XPress the Start/Stop button.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system

The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-

cle occupants coming into contact with parts of

the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.

The restraint system can also reduce the forces

to which vehicle occupants are subjected during

an accident.

The restraint system comprises:

RSeat belt system

RAir bags

The components of the restraint system work in

conjunction with each other. They can only

deploy their protective function if, at all times, all

vehicle occupants:

Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly

(Ypage 39)

Rhave the seat adjusted properly

(Ypage 75)

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the

head restraints must also be adjusted prop-

erly.

As the driver, you also have to make sure that

the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.

Observe the information relating to the correct

driver's seat position (Ypage 75).

You also have to make sure that an air bag can

inflate properly if deployed (Ypage 41).

An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat

belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag

increases the level of protection for vehicle

occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-

ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection

offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags

are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only

the air bags that increase protection in that par-

ticular accident situation are deployed. How-

ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not

protect against objects penetrating the vehicle

from the outside.

Information on restraint system operation can

be found under "Triggering of the Emergency

Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Ypage 48).

See "Children in the vehicle" for information on

children traveling with you in the vehicle as well

as on child restraint systems (Ypage 50).

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Modifications to the restraint system may

cause it to no longer work as intended. The

restraint system may then not perform its

intended protective function and may fail in an

accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Never modify parts of the restraint system.

Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic

components or their software.

If it is necessary to modify components of the

restraint system to accommodate a person

with disabilities, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:

for further information contact our Customer

Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

driving aids which have been approved specifi-

cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

36 Occupant safety

Safety

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are

checked after the ignition is switched on and at

regular intervals while the engine is running.

Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in

good time.

The 6restraint system warning lamp on the

instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-

nents of the restraint system are in operational

readiness.

A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint

system warning lamp:

Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched

Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the

engine running

Rlights up again while the engine is running

GWARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,

restraint system components may be trig-

gered unintentionally or may not deploy as

intended during an accident. This can affect

for example the Emergency Tensioning

Device or the air bag. This poses an increased

risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and

repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :and

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ;are

part of the Occupant Classification System

(OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag must

either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-

lowing points. You must make sure of this both

before and during a journey.

RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is

enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-

led child restraint system, and the age and

size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe

the notes on the "Occupant Classification

System (OCS)" (Ypage 43) and on "Chil-

dren in the vehicle" (Ypage 50). There you

will also find instructions on rearward and

forward-facing child restraint systems on the

front-passenger seat.

RAll other persons: depending on the classi-

fication of the person in the front-passenger

seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-

bled or deactivated (Ypage 43). Be sure to

observe the notes on "Seat

belts“ (Ypage 37) and "Air bags"

(Ypage 41). There you can also find infor-

mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction

Seat belts are the most effective means of

restricting the movement of vehicle occupants

in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling

over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants

coming into contact with parts of the vehicle

interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-

thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

Occupant safety 37

Safety

occupant in the best position in relation to the

air bag.

The seat belt system comprises:

RSeat belts

REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat seat

belt force limiters

If the seat belt is pulled by the belt loop quickly

or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor

locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any

further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the

seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close

against the body. However it does not pull the

vehicle occupant back in the direction of the

backrest.

The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-

rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of

an incorrectly fastened seat belt.

When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to

reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the

vehicle occupant.

The seat belt force limiters are synchronized

with the front air bags which absorb part of the

deceleration force. This can reduce the force

exerted on the vehicle occupants during an acci-

dent.

!If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,

do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of

the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise

lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-

sioning Device in the event of an accident,

which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notes

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

Rall 50 states

Rthe U.S. territories

Rthe District of Columbia

Rall Canadian provinces

Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle

occupants should correctly fasten their seat

belts before starting the journey.

GWARNING

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot

perform its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-

ting properly.

GWARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

GWARNING

Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot

wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-

tional and suitable restraint system. If the

seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-

form its intended protective function. An

incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-

dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury

or even fatal injury.

For this reason, always secure persons under

5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint

systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and

under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

Ralways secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-

cle. The child restraint system must be appro-

priate to the age, weight and size of the child

Ralways observe the instructions and safety

notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Ypage 50) in addition to the child restraint

38 Occupant safety

Safety

system manufacturer's installation and oper-

ating instructions

Ralways observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (Ypage 43)

GWARNING

The seat belts may not perform their intended

protective function if:

Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely

dirty, bleached or dyed

Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or

extremely dirty

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt

anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-

fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,

although the damage may not be visible, e.g.

due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged

seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.

Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices

could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy

when necessary. This poses an increased risk

of injury or even fatal injury.

Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia

reels. Make sure that the seat belts are

undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-

ing an accident, have the seat belts checked

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed

for the standard three-point seat belt. If you

install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or

racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot

provide the best level of protection.

GWARNING

If you feed seat belts through the opening in

the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be

damaged or may even break in the event of an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Only use the standard three-point seat belt.

Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat belts

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Ypage 38).

All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat

belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also

make sure that all vehicle occupants are always

wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle

is in motion.

When fastening the seat belt, always make sure

that:

Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only

into the belt buckle belonging to that seat.

Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body.

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.

Rthe seat belt is not twisted.

Only then can the forces which occur be dis-

tributed over the area of the belt.

Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

The shoulder section of the seat belt should

not touch your neck or be routed under your

arm or behind your back.

Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap

as low down as possible.

The lap belt must always be routed across

your hip joints and not across your abdomen.

This applies particularly to pregnant women.

If necessary, push the lap belt down to your

hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder

section of the belt.

Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-

ted or fragile objects.

If you have such items located on or in your

clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store

these in a suitable place.

Ronly one person is using a seat belt.

Infants and children must never travel sitting

on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event

of an accident, they could be crushed

between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.

Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if

the seat belt is also being used by one of the

vehicle's occupants.

Also ensure that there are never objects

between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and

restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the

"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-

gage or loads (Ypage 205).

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Fastening seat belts

Observethesafetynoteson theseat belt

(Ypage 38)and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Ypage 39).

Basic illustration

XAdjust the seat (Ypage 75).

The seat backrest must be in an almost

upright position.

XPull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop =

and engage belt tongue ;into belt

buckle :.

The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the

front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-

matically, see "Belt adjustment"

(Ypage 40).

XIf necessary, pull up on the shoulder section

of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your

body.

In order to attach the child restraint system

securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the front-

passenger seat is equipped with a special seat

belt retractor. Further information on the "Spe-

cial seat belt retractor" (Ypage 51).

Releasing seat belts

!Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.

Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be

trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

This could damage the door, the door trim

panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts

can no longer fulfill their protective function

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

XPress the release button in the belt buckle,

hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt

back.

Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of

the PRE-SAFE®convenience function. This func-

tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger

seat belt to the upper body of the vehicle occu-

pants.

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and

Rthe ignition is switched on

The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain

retraction force if any slack is detected between

the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not

hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-

ing.

You can activate and deactivate the seat-belt

adjustment function using the multimedia sys-

tem. Information on activating and deactivating

the seat-belt adjustment function can be found

in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and front

passenger

The 7seat belt warning lamp in the instru-

ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-

pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up

continuously or flash. In addition, there may be

a warning tone.

Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has

already been fastened, the 7seat belt warn-

ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the

engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver

or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-

tened and the doors are closed, the 7seat

belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-

er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened

or a front door is opened again, the 7seat

belt warning lamp goes out.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the

engine is started, an additional warning tone will

sound. The warning tone switches off after six

seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-

tened.

If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-

passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning

tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with

increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the

40 Occupant safety

Safety

driver or front passenger have fastened their

seat belts.

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their

seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-

ing is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction

The installation point of an air bag can be rec-

ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.

An air bag complements the correctly fastened

seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The

air bag provides additional protection in appli-

cable accident situations.

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The

different air bag systems function independ-

ently from one another (Ypage 48).

However, no system available today can com-

pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury

caused by an air bag due to the high speed at

which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you do not sit in the correct seat position,

the air bag cannot protect as intended and

could even cause additional injury when

deployed. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always make

sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:

Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,

including pregnant women

Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-

est possible distance to the air bags

Rfollow the following instructions

Always make sure that there are no objects

between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-

pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning

your journey. Always make sure that the seat

is in an almost upright position. The center of

the head restraint must support the head at

about eye level.

The setting options are different depending

on the seat model.

RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats

as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-

tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.

ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.

RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-

ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the

door or side window. You may otherwise be in

the deployment area of the air bags.

RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front

of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-

board, for example. Your feet may otherwise

be in the deployment area of the air bag.

RFor this reason, always secure persons less

than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-

tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot

be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also

observe the following notes:

RAlways secure children under twelve years of

age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable

child restraint systems.

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

when the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated

(Ypage 37).

RAlways observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant Classification System

(OCS)" (Ypage 43) and on "Children in the

vehicle" (Ypage 50) in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent

an air bag from functioning correctly. Before

starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting

from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make

sure that:

Rthere are no people, animals or objects

between the vehicle occupants and an air bag

Rthere are no objects between the seat, door

and B-pillar

Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are

attached to the vehicle within the deployment

Occupant safety 41

Safety

area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-

dows

Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in

the pockets of your clothing. Store such

objects in a suitable place

GWARNING

If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects

such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer

function correctly. There is an increased risk

of injury.

Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects

to it.

GWARNING

Sensors to control the air bags are located in

the doors. Modifications or work not per-

formed correctly to the doors or door panel-

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The air

bags might therefore not function properly

anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot

protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do. There is an increased risk of

injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

Always have work on the doors or door pan-

eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Front air bags

!Do not place heavy objects on the front-

passenger seat. This could cause the system

to identify the seat as being occupied. In the

event of an accident, the restraint systems on

the front-passenger side may be triggered

and have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag :deploys in front of the steer-

ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;

deploys in front of and above the glove box.

When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-

tional head and thorax protection for the occu-

pants in the driver's and front-passenger seats.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

informs you about the status of the front-

passenger front air bag (Ypage 37).

The front-passenger front air bag will only

deploy if:

Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor

readings, detects that the front-passenger

seat is occupied (Ypage 43). The

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is

not lit (Ypage 44)

Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a

high accident severity

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag :deploys under the steering

column and front-passenger knee bag ;under

the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger

knee bags are triggered together with the front

air bags.

The driver's and front-passenger knee bags

offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-

tection.

Side impact air bags

GWARNING

Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-

vent deployment of the air bags integrated

into the seats. Consequently, the air bags

cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are

designed to do. In addition, the operation of

the occupant classification system (OCS)

42 Occupant safety

Safety

could be adversely affected. This poses an

increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that have

been approved for the respective seat by

Mercedes-Benz.

Side impact air bags :deploy next to the outer

bolster of the seat backrest.

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers

additional thorax protection. However, it does

not protect the:

Rhead

Rneck

Rarms

AMG Performance seat: increased pelvis pro-

tection is also offered for occupants in the front

seats.

In the event of a side impact, the side impact air

bag is deployed on the side on which the impact

occurs.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys under the following conditions:

Rthe OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the

belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,

the side impact air bag on the front-passenger

side deploys if an appropriate accident situation

occurs. In this case, deployment is independent

of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags :are integrated in the

side of the roof frame above the doors.

When deployed, the window curtain air bag

enhances the level of protection for the head.

However, it does not protect the chest or arms.

In the event of a side impact, the window curtain

air bag is deployed on the side on which the

impact occurs.

If the system determines that they can offer

additional protection to that provided by the

seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be

deployed in other accident situations

(Ypage 48).

Occupant Classification System

(OCS)

Introduction

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-

egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.

Depending on that result, the front-passenger

front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are

either enabled or deactivated.

The system does not deactivate:

Rthe side impact air bag

Rthe window curtain air bag

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Requirements

To be classified correctly, the front passenger

must sit:

Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly

Rin an almost upright position with their back

against the seat backrest

Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible

Occupant safety 43

Safety

If the front passenger does not observe these

conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-

tion, e.g. because the front passenger:

Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-

selves on a vehicle armrest

Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised

from the seat cushion

If you install a child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the

correct positioning of the child restraint system.

Never place objects under or behind the child

restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base

of the child restraint system must always rest on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat.

The backrest of the forward-facing child

restraint system must lie as flat as possible

against the backrest of the front-passenger

seat.

The child restraint system must not touch the

roof or be subjected to a load by the head

restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest

and the head restraint position accordingly.

Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function

correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation and operating

instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-

tion (OCS)

:PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

;PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or

enabled.

XPress the Start/Stop button once or twice, or

turn the SmartKey to position 1or 2in the

ignition lock.

The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER

AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-

taneously for approximately six seconds.

The indicator lamps display the status of the

front-passenger front air bag.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-

onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are

off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the

front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy

in the event of an accident.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-

dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

If the status of the front-passenger front air bag

changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag

display message appears in the instrument clus-

ter (Ypage 171). When the front-passenger

seat is occupied, always pay attention to the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be

aware of the status of the front-passenger front

air bag both before and during the journey.

GWARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is

disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of

an accident and cannot perform its intended

protective function. A person in the front-

passenger seat could then, for example, come

into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-

cially if the person is sitting too close to the

dashboard. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

back as far back as possible.

Rthe person is seated correctly.

44 Occupant safety

Safety

Make sure, both before and during the jour-

ney, that the status of the front-passenger

front air bag is correct.

GWARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag

may deploy in the event of an accident. The

child could be struck by the air bag. This poses

an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger front air

bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

You can find more information on OCS under

"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-

tem" (Ypage 47).

GWARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat

and you position the front-passenger seat too

close to the dashboard, in the event of an

accident, the child could:

Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-

rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

cator lamp is lit, for example

Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even

fatal injury.

Move the front-passenger seat as far back as

possible. Always make sure that the shoulder

belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle

belt loop to the shoulder belt guide on the

child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap

must be routed forwards and downwards

from the vehicle belt loop. Always observe the

child restraint system manufacturer's instal-

lation instructions.

If OCS determines that:

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up after the system self-test and

remains lit. This indicates that the front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a

child of up to twelve months old, in a standard

child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the

system self-test and remains lit. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

deactivated.

But even in the case of a twelve-month-old

child, in a standard child restraint system, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can

go out after the system self-test. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated. The result of the classification is

dependent on, among other factors, the child

restraint system and the child's stature. Make

sure that the conditions for a correct classi-

fication are met. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install

a child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-

son with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager or

small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after

the system self-test depending on the result

of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.

-If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat

as far back as possible.

-If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature

should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an

adult or a person of adult stature, the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

goes out after the system self-test. This indi-

cates that the front-passenger front air bag is

activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to

observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"

(Ypage 50).

When the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint

system warning lamp on the instrument cluster

and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp light up simultaneously. The front-

passenger front air bag is deactivated in this

Occupant safety 45

Safety

case and does not deploy during an accident.

Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

checked and repaired immediately at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose.

If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the

seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary

repair work carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for this purpose.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you only use seat accessories that

have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not

mean that the front-passenger front air bag will

also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-

tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-

passenger seat. Depending on that result, the

front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or

deactivated.

System self-test

GDANGER

If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do

not light up during the system self-test, the

system is malfunctioning. The front-

passenger front air bag might be triggered

unintentionally or might not be triggered at all

in the event of an accident with high deceler-

ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat may not

be used. Do not install a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-

pant Classification System (OCS) checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

GWARNING

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the

front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will

not be deployed in the event of an accident. In

this case, the front-passenger front air bag

cannot perform its intended protective func-

tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-

passenger seat.

That person could, for example, come into

contact with the vehicle's interior, especially

if the person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

When the front-passenger seat is occupied,

always ensure that:

Rthe classification of the person in the front-

passenger seat is correct and the front-

passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

bled in accordance with the person in the

front-passenger seat

Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-

rectly fastened seatbelt

Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved

as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

passenger seat may not be used. Do not

install a child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-

cation System (OCS) checked and repaired

immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

GWARNING

Objects between the seat surface and the

child restraint system could affect OCS oper-

ation. This could result in the front-passenger

air bag not functioning as intended during an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

Do not place any objects between the seat

surface and the child restraint system. The

entire base of the child restraint system must

always rest on the seat cushion of the front-

passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far as

possible, be resting on the backrest of the

front-passenger seat. Always comply with the

child restraint system manufacturer's instal-

lation instructions.

46 Occupant safety

Safety

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator

lamp displays the status of the front-passenger

front air bag (Ypage 44). If the front-passenger

front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds

and then goes out.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is

off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-

lems with the Occupant Classification System"

(Ypage 47).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Ypage 46).

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up and remains lit,

even though the front-

passenger seat is occu-

pied by an adult or a per-

son of a stature corre-

sponding to that of an

adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-

rect.

XMake sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person

on the front-passenger seat are met (Ypage 43).

XIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-

passenger seat may not be used.

XHave OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF indicator lamp

does not light up and/or

does not stay on.

The front-passenger seat

is:

Runoccupied

Roccupied with the

weight of a child up to

twelve months old in a

child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.

XMake sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child

seat.

XMake sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on

the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the

forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible

against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,

adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

XWhen installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat

belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger

seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child

restraint system being pulled too tightly.

XCheck for correct installation of the child restraint system.

Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child

restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-

ingly.

XMake sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the

seat.

XIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or

the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install

a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

XHave OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

Devicesandair bags

Important safetynotes

GWARNING

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has

beendeployed.There is ariskof injury.

Do nottouch theair bag parts.Have a

deployed air bag replaced at aqualified spe-

cialistworkshop as soonas possible.

GWARNING

Adeployed air bag no longer offers any pro-

tection and cannotprovidetheintended pro-

tection in an accident. There is an increased

riskof injury.

Havethevehicle towed to aqualified special-

ist workshop in order to have a deployed air

bag replaced.

Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you havethe

vehicle transportedto aqualified specialist

workshop after an accident. Observethenotes

on towingthevehicle away (Ypage 245).

Foryour own safetyand that of your front

passenger,it is important that you have

deployed air bags replaced and faulty air bags

repaired. Thiswill helpto makesuretheair bags

continue to perform their protective function for

thevehicle occupantsin theevent of acrash.

GWARNING

Emergency Tensioning Devices that have

deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-

tional and are unable to perform their inten-

ded protective function.Thisposes an

increasedriskof injury or evenfatal injury.

Havepyrotechnically triggeredEmergency

Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a

qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motoris used by PRE-SAFE®to trig-

ger thetighteningof theseat belt in hazardous

situations. Thisprocedureis reversible.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered

or air bags are deployed,you will hear abang,

and asmall amount of powder may also be

released. The 6restraintsystemwarning

lamp lights up.

Only in rarecases will thebangaffectyour hear-

ing. The powder that is releasedgenerally does

notconstitute ahealth hazard,but it may cause

short-term breathingdifficulties in people with

asthmaor other respiratoryproblems. Provided

it is safeto do so, you should leavethevehicle

immediately or openthewindow in order to pre-

ventbreathingdifficulties.

Airbags and pyrotechnicEmergency Tensioning

Devices (ETDs) contain perchloratematerial,

whichmay require special handlingand regard

fortheenvironment. National guidelines must

be observed duringdisposal. In California, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation

Duringthefirst stage of acollision,therestraint

systemcontrolunitevaluates important physi-

cal datarelatingto vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration,suchas:

Rduration

Rdirection

Rintensity

Based on theevaluation of this data, the

restraintsystem controlunittriggers theEmer-

gency Tensioning Devices during a frontalor

rearcollision.

An Emergency Tensioning Devicecan only be

triggered, if:

Rtheignition is switched on

Rthecomponentsof therestraintsystemare

operational. You can findfurther information

under: "Restraintsystem warninglamp"

(Ypage 37)

Rtheseat belt buckletongue has engagedin

thebelt buckleof therespective seat

If therestraintsystem controlunitdetects a

more severe accident, further componentsof

therestraintsystem are activated independ-

entlyof eachother in certain frontalcollision

situations:

RFrontair bags as well as driver's and front-

passenger knee bags

RSide impact air bag and window curtain air

bag, if thesystemdetermines that deploy-

mentcan offeradditional protection to that

provided by theseat belt

The front-passenger frontair bag is activated or

deactivated dependingon theperson on the

front-passenger seat.The front-passenger front

48 Occupant safety

Safety

air bag can only deploy in an accident if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR

BAG indicator lamps (Ypage 37).

Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During

the first deployment stage, the front air bag is

filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of

injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with

the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-

ond deployment threshold is reached within a

few milliseconds.

The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-

sioning Devices and the air bag are determined

by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or

acceleration which occurs at various points in

the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in

nature. Deployment should take place in good

time at the start of the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration

and the direction of the force are essentially

determined by:

Rthe distribution of forces during the collision

Rthe collision angle

Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle

Rthe characteristics of the object with which

the vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measured

after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do

they provide an indication of air bag deploy-

ment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-

out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if

only parts which are relatively easily deformed

are affected and the rate of deceleration is not

high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even

though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-

tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid

vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-

bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs

as a result.

If the restraint system control unit detects a side

impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable

components of the restraint system are activa-

ted independently of each other depending on

the apparent type of accident.

RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,

independently of the Emergency Tensioning

Device and the use of the seat belt on the

driver's seat

The side impact air bag on the front-

passenger side deploys under the following

conditions:

-the OCS system detects that the front-

passenger seat is occupied or

-the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in

the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,

independently of the use of the seat belt and

independently of whether the front-

passenger seat is occupied

REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system

determines that deployment can offer addi-

tional protection in this situation

RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and

front-passenger side in certain situations

when the vehicle rolls over, if the system

determines that deployment can offer addi-

tional protection to that provided by the seat

belt

iNot all air bags are deployed in an accident.

The different air bag systems work independ-

ently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined

by the severity of the accident detected,

especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-

eration and the apparent type of accident:

RFrontal collision

RSide impact

RRollover

PRE-SAFE®(anticipatory occupant

protection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®

takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-

cle occupants.

Important safety notes

!Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger

that the seats and/or objects could be dam-

aged when PRE-SAFE®is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the

PRE-SAFE®system, the possibility of personal

injuries occurring as a result of an accident can-

not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving

Occupant safety 49

Safety

style to suit the prevailing road and weather

conditions and maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE®intervenes:

Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when

BAS is activated

Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-

cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-

steers or oversteers severely

Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if adaptive

Brake Assist intervenes powerfully

PRE-SAFE®takes the following measures

depending on the hazardous situation detected:

Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are

closed.

Rvehicles with the memory function for the

front-passenger seat: the front-passenger

seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi-

tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-

ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE®slackens the belt

pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®

can then be reversed.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:

XMove the seat backrest or seat back slightly

when the vehicle is stationary.

The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and

the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of

the PRE-SAFE®convenience function. Informa-

tion about the convenience function can be

found under "Belt adjustment" (Ypage 40).

Automatic measures after an acci-

dent

Immediately after an accident, the following

measures are implemented, depending on the

type and severity of the impact:

Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated

Rthe emergency lighting is activated

Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked

Rthe front side windows are lowered

Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri-

cally adjustable steering wheel is raised when

the driver's door is opened

Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply

is cut off

Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency

call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

If a child younger than twelve years old and

under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the

vehicle:

Ralways secure the child in a child restraint

system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

The child restraint system must be appropri-

ate to the age, weight and size of the child

Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes in this section in addition to the child

restraint system manufacturer's installation

instructions

Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety

notes on the "Occupant classification system

(OCS)" (Ypage 43)

GWARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion, for example by:

Rreleasing the parking brake

Rshifting the transmission to the neutral

position

Rstarting the engine

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

GWARNING

If persons, particularly children are subjected

to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or

cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

50 Children in the vehicle

Safety

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is subjected to

direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,

particularly on the metal parts of the child

restraint system. There is a risk of injury.

If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with

you, always ensure that the child restraint

system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-

tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child

restraint system has been exposed to direct

sunlight, let it cool down before securing the

child in it. Never leave children unattended in

the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have

their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting

properly. Particular attention must be paid to

children.

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt

(Ypage 38) and the notes on correct use of seat

belts (Ypage 39).

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve

proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a

three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

GWARNING

If the seat belt is released while driving, the

child restraint system will no longer be

secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-

tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot

be immediately refastened. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-

tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate

the special seat belt retractor and secure the

child restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side is

equipped with a special seat belt retractor.

When activated, the special seat belt retractor

ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once

the child restraint system has been secured.

Installing a child restraint system:

XAlways comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions.

XPull the seat belt smoothly out of the seat belt

guide.

XEngage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

XPull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again.

While the seat belt is retracting, you should

hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt

retractor is activated.

XPush the child seat restraint system down so

that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-

vating the special seat belt retractor:

XAlways comply with the child restraint system

manufacturer's installation instructions.

XPress the belt buckle release button and

guide the belt tongue to the seat belt guide.

The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems

is required by law in:

Rall 50 states

Rthe U.S. territories

Rthe District of Columbia

Rall Canadian provinces

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as

intended. The child cannot then be restrained

in the event of an accident, heavy braking or

sudden changes of direction. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Make sure that you observe the child restraint

system manufacturer's installation instruc-

tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,

that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush-

ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under

or behind the child restraint system. Only use

child restraint systems with the original cover

Children in the vehicle 51

Safety

designed for them. Only replace damaged

covers with genuine covers.

GWARNING

If the child restraint system is installed incor-

rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in

the event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The child

restraint system could be thrown about, strik-

ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased

risk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems prop-

erly, even if they are not being used. Make

sure that you observe the child restraint sys-

tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-

lines" (Ypage 205).

GWARNING

Child restraint systems or their securing sys-

tems which have been damaged or subjected

to a load in an accident can no longer protect

as intended. The child cannot then be

restrained in the event of an accident, heavy

braking or sudden changes of direction. There

is an increased risk of injury, possibly even

fatal.

Replace child restraint systems which have

been damaged or subjected to a load in an

accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-

ing systems on the child restraint system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop,

before you install a child restraint system

again.

The securing system of child restraint systems is

the seat belt system.

If you install a child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the

instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant

Classification System (OCS)" (Ypage 43). There

you will also find information on deactivating the

front-passenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-

lowing standards:

RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 225

RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-

responds to the standards can be found on an

instruction label on the child restraint system.

This confirmation can also be found in the instal-

lation instructions that are included with the

child restraint system.

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-

rior and on the child restraint system.

Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat

General notes

If you install a child restraint system on the

front-passenger seat, always observe the

instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant

Classification System (OCS)" (Ypage 43).

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as

a result of:

Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-

passenger seat

Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-

passenger front air bag

Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child

restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-

board

Rearward-facing child restraint system

If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-

facing child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat, always make sure that the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp is permanently lit (Ypage 37) is the front-

passenger front air bag deactivated.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front-passenger seat,

always move the front-passenger seat as far

52 Children in the vehicle

Safety

back as possible. The entire base of the child

restraint system must always rest on the seat

cushion of the front-passenger seat. The back-

rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat

as possible against the backrest of the front-

passenger seat. The child restraint system must

not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by

the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat

backrest and the head restraint position accord-

ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt

strap is correctly routed from the front-

passenger seat belt loop to the shoulder belt

guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-

der belt strap must be routed forward and down

from the front-passenger seat belt loop.

Always observe the child restraint system man-

ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-

tions.

Pets in the vehicle

GWARNING

If you leave animals unattended or unsecured

in the vehicle, they could press buttons or

switches, for example.

As a result, they could:

Ractivate vehicle equipment and become

trapped, for example

Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby

endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around

the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-

den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-

cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident

and injury.

Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-

cle. Always secure animals properly during

the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-

port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information about

the following driving safety systems:

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Ypage 53)

RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Ypage 54)

RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

(Ypage 54)

RESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

(Ypage 57)

REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

(Ypage 59)

RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Ypage 59)

Important safety notes

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are

inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-

ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override

the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are

merely aids designed to assist driving. You are

responsible for maintaining the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in

good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt

your driving style to suit the prevailing road and

weather conditions and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

The driving safety systems described only work

as effectively as possible when there is ade-

quate contact between the tires and the road

surface. Please pay special attention to the

notes on tires, recommended minimum tire

tread depths, etc. (Ypage 250).

In wintry driving conditions, always use winter

tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.

Only in this way will the driving safety systems

described in this section work as effectively as

possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that

the wheels do not lock when you brake. This

allows you to continue steering the vehicle when

braking.

Driving safety systems 53

Safety

The !ABS warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the ignition is switched

on. It goes out when the engine is running.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.

ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you

only brake gently.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when

braking. The steerability and braking charac-

teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-

ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-

ding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-

diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also

become inoperative. Observe the information

on the ABS warning lamp (Ypage 188) and dis-

play messages which may be shown in the

instrument cluster (Ypage 163).

Brakes

XIf ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-

uation is over.

XTo make a full brake application: depress

the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a

pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication

of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a

reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information

BAS operates in emergency braking situations.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS

automatically boosts the braking force, thus

shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance

in an emergency braking situation is

increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress

the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents

the wheels from locking.

Braking

XKeep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you

release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

PLUS

General information

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists

of a distance warning function with an autono-

mous braking function and adaptive Brake

Assist.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help

you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision

with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of

such a collision.

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will

be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not

react to the visual and audible collision warning,

autonomous braking can be initiated in critical

situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a

critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION

ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

54 Driving safety systems

Safety

Important safety notes

In particular, thedetection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on thesensorsor anythingelse

covering thesensors

Rthere is snow or heavyrain

Rthere is interferenceby other radar sources

Rthere are strongradar reflections, for exam-

ple in parking garages

Ranarrow vehicleis traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike

Ravehicleis traveling in fronton adifferentline

Rthevehicleis newor after aserviceon the

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSsys-

tem.

Observetheimportant safetynotesin the

"Breaking-in notes" section (Ypage 98).

Followingdamageto thefrontendof thevehicle,

havetheconfiguration and operation of the

radar sensor checkedat aqualified specialist

workshop. This also appliesto collisionsat slow

speeds wherethere is no visible damageto the

frontof thevehicle.

Activating/deactivating

The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis

automatically active after switching on theigni-

tion.

You can activateor deactivateCOLLISION PRE-

VENTION ASSIST PLUSin theon-board com-

puter (Ypage 156). When deactivated, thedis-

tance warning function and theautonomous

braking function are also deactivated.

If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis

deactivated, theæsymbol appearsin the

assistancegraphicsdisplay.

Distance warning function

General information

The distancewarning function can help you to

minimizetheriskof afront-endcollision with a

vehicleahead or reduce theeffects of such a

collision.If thedistancewarning function

detects that there is ariskof acollision,you will

be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes

iObservethe"Importantsafetynotes" sec-

tion for driving safetysystems (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

The distancewarning function does notreact:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncomingvehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rwhen cornering

Thus,thedistancewarning function cannot

provide awarning in all critical situations.

Thereis ariskof an accident.

Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-

uation and be readyto brake.

GWARNING

The distancewarning function cannotalways

clearly identify objects and complextraffic

situations.

In suchcases, thedistancewarning function

may:

Rgivean unnecessary warning

Rnotgive a warning

Thereis ariskof an accident.

Always pay careful attention to thetraffic sit-

uation and do notrelysolely on thedistance

warning function.

Function

Starting at aspeedof approximately 4mph

(7 km/h), thedistancewarning function warns

you if you rapidly approach a vehiclein front. An

intermittent warning tone will then sound, and

the·distancewarning lamp will lightup in

theinstrumentcluster.

XBrake immediately in order to increasethe

distancefrom thevehiclein front.

XTakeevasive action,providedit is safeto do

so.

Due to thenature of thesystem, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also causethesystem to display awarning.

Withthehelp of theradar sensor system, the

distancewarning function can detectobstacles

Driving safety systems 55

Safety

that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-

ded period of time.

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), the distance warning function can

also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop-

ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function

If the driver does not react to the distance warn-

ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-

VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the

autonomous braking function.

The autonomous braking function:

Rgives the driver more time to react to critical

driving situations

Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or

Rreduces the effects of an accident.

Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the

autonomous braking function is available in the

following speed ranges:

Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph

(105 km/h) for moving objects

Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph

(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono-

mous braking function is available in the follow-

ing speed ranges:

Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately

124 mph (200 km/h) for moving objects

Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approximately

31 mph (50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-

tion to intervene.

If the autonomous braking function requires a

particularly high braking force, preventative

passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)

are activated simultaneously (Ypage 49).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General information

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-

tance warning signal can detect obstacles that

are in the path of your vehicle for an extended

period of time.

If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-

sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the

braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If

you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake

Assist will automatically increase the braking

force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-

tance in hazardous situations at speeds above

4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology

to assess the traffic situation.

Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph

(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of

reacting to moving objects that have already

been detected as such at least once over the

period of observation.

Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph

(70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-

tionary obstacles.

If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly

high braking force, preventative passenger pro-

tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated

simultaneously (Ypage 49).

XKeep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:

Ryou release the brake pedal.

Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.

Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-

cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion for driving safety systems (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly

identify objects and complex traffic situa-

tions.

In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:

Rintervene unnecessarily

Rnot intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the

intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

56 Driving safetysystems

Safety

GWARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncoming vehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rwhen cornering

As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not

intervene in all critical conditions. There is a

risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated but non-critical driving conditions

may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.

If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a

malfunction in the radar sensor system, the

brake system remains available with full brake

boosting effect and BAS.

ESP®(Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

ESP®monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.

power transmission between the tires and the

road surface.

If ESP®detects that the vehicle is deviating from

the direction desired by the driver, one or more

wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The

engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-

cle on the desired course within physical limits.

ESP®assists the driver when pulling away on

wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize

the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

ETS traction control is part of ESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-

vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull

away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for

example if the road surface is slippery on one

side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-

red to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Traction control remains active, even if you

deactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP®is unable to

stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-

ing safety systems are deactivated. This

increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP®checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

ESP®is only deactivated if the åwarning

lamp is lit continuously.

When SPORT handling mode is activated, the

Mwarning lamp lights up in the instrument

panel.

When the åand hwarning lamps light up

continuously, ESP®is not available due to a mal-

function.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(Ypage 188) and display messages which may

be shown in the instrument cluster

(Ypage 163).

Only use wheels with the recommended tire

sizes. Only then will ESP®function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General information

If the ÷ESP®warning lamp goes out before

beginning the journey, ESP®is automatically

active.

If ESP®intervenes, the ÷ESP®warning lamp

flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP®intervenes:

XDo not deactivate ESP®under any circum-

stances.

XOnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary when pulling away.

XAdapt your driving style to suit the prevailing

road and weather conditions.

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

ECO start/stop function

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically when the vehicle stops

moving. The engine starts automatically when

the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®

remains in its previously selected status. Exam-

ple: if ESP®was deactivated before the engine

was switched off, ESP®remains deactivated

when the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

You can select between the following states of

ESP®:

RESP®is activated.

RSPORT handling mode is activated.

RESP®is deactivated.

GWARNING

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP®no longer sta-

bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk

of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP®in the situations descri-

bed in the following.

GWARNING

When SPORT handling mode is activated,

there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-

dents.

Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-

uations described in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better to

activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate

ESP®:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

Ron closed roads when the vehicle's own over-

steering and understeering characteristics

are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without

ESP®requires an extremely qualified and expe-

rienced driver.

Activate ESP®as soon as the situations descri-

bed above no longer apply. ESP®will otherwise

not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle

starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

!Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP®deactivated. You

could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

XTo activate SPORT handling mode: briefly

press button :.

The Mhandling mode warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT han‐

dling mode message appears in the multi-

function display.

XTo deactivate SPORT handling mode:

briefly press button :.

The Mhandling mode warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. ESP®is activa-

ted.

XTo deactivate ESP®:press button :.

The åESP®OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up. The ÷OFF

message appears in the multifunction display.

XTo activate ESP®:when SPORT handling

mode is activated or ESP®is deactivated,

press button :.

The åESP®OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON

message appears in the multifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-

dling mode

If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or

more wheels start to spin, the ÷ESP®warn-

ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®

only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.

58 Driving safety systems

Safety

When SPORT handling mode is activated:

RESP®only improves driving stability to a limi-

ted degree.

RTraction control is still activated.

REngine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for

better traction on loose surfaces.

RESP®still provides support when you brake

firmly.

Characteristics when ESP®is deactivated

If ESP®is deactivated and one or more wheels

start to spin, the ÷ESP®warning lamp in the

instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,

ESP®will not stabilize the vehicle.

If you deactivate ESP®:

RESP®no longer improves driving stability.

REngine torque is no longer limited and the

drive wheels are able to spin.

The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting

action for better traction on loose surfaces.

RTraction control is still activated.

RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer

available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly

with assistance from ESP.

RPRE-SAFE®is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®inter-

venes.

RESP®still provides support when you brake

firmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-

tion)

General information

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure

on the rear wheels to improve driving stability

while braking.

Important safety notes

iObserve the "Important safety notes" sec-

tion (Ypage 53).

GWARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can

lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the

risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

to the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and

warning lamps (Ypage 188) as well as display

messages (Ypage 165).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and

offers increased braking comfort. In addition to

the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also fea-

tures the hill start assist function (Ypage 101).

Protection against theft

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct SmartKey.

XTo activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-

tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off

and open the driver's door.

XTo activate with the SmartKey: remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XTo deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone

can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been

left inside the vehicle.

iThe immobilizer is always deactivated when

you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-

tem is not operational. Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Protection against theft 59

Safety

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

XTo arm: lockthevehiclewiththeSmartKey or

KEYLESS-GO.

Indicatorlamp :flashes.The alarm system

is armed after approximately 15 seconds.

XTo disarm: unlockthevehiclewiththeSmart-

Key or KEYLESS-GO.

XInserttheSmartKey intotheignition lock.

Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:

Radoor

Rthevehiclewiththemechanical key

Rthetailgate

Rthehood

XTo turn thealarm off withtheSmartKey:

press the%or &buttonon theSmart-

Key.

The alarm is switched off.

XInserttheSmartKey intotheignition lock.

The alarm is switched off.

XTo stop thealarm using KEYLESS-GO:

grasptheoutside door handle. The SmartKey

mustbe outside thevehicle.

The alarm is switched off.

XPress theStart/Stopbutton. The SmartKey

mustbe inside thevehicle.

The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is notswitched off,evenif you close

theopen door that triggered it,for example.

iIf thealarm continues for morethan

30 seconds, thembrace emergencycall sys-

temautomatically notifiestheCustomer

Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text

message or dataconnection.

The emergencycall system sends amessage

or establishes adataconnection provided

that:

Ryou havesubscribed to thembrace service.

Rthembrace servicehas been activated

properly.

Rthenecessarymobile phone network is

available.

60 Protection against theft

Safety

SmartKey

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

GWARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-

tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could

cause the engine to be switched off. There is a

risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before

inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

!Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control

function could be affected.

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-

ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey.

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do

not keep the SmartKey on the cargo compart-

ment cover or in the cargo compartment. Oth-

erwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g.

when starting the engine using the Start/Stop

button.

A brief radio connection between the vehicle

and the SmartKey determines whether a valid

SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the

vehicle. This occurs, for example:

Rwhen starting the engine

Rwhile driving

Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Rwhen the external door handles are touched

Rduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

:&To lock the vehicle

;FTo open the tailgate

=%To unlock the vehicle

XTo unlock centrally: press the %button.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-

imately 40 seconds of unlocking:

Rthe vehicle is locked again.

Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armed again.

XTo lock centrally: press the &button.

The key centrally locks and unlocks the doors

and the fuel filler flap.

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.

When locking, they flash three times.

You can also set an audible signal to confirm

that the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated and deactivated via the

multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's

Manual).

SmartKey 61

Opening and closing

When the locator lighting is activated via the

multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark

after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey.

Information on activating and deactivating the

locator lighting can be found in the Digital Oper-

ator's Manual.

XTo open the tailgate: press and hold the

Fbutton until the tailgate opens.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Ypage 101).

Locking/unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the

SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-

tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using

KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the

&button on the SmartKey.

The driver's door and the door at which the han-

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle. When locking or

unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance

between the SmartKey and the corresponding

door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. This occurs, for example:

Rwhen starting the engine

Rwhile driving

Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Rwhen the external door handles are touched

Rduring convenience closing

XTo unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-

face of the door handle.

XTo lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :

or ;.

Make sure that you do not touch the inner

surface of the door handle.

XConvenience closing feature: touch

recessed sensor surface ;for an extended

period.

Further information on the convenience clos-

ing feature (Ypage 73).

Deactivating and activating

If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-

ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,

thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-

poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle

must not be nearby.

XTo deactivate: press the &button on the

SmartKey twice in rapid succession.

The battery check lamp of the SmartKey

flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then

KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Ypage 64).

XTo activate: press any button on the Smart-

Key.

XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features

are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notes

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by

any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle (Ypage 101).

62 SmartKey

Opening and closing

Changing the settings of the locking

system

You can change the settings of the locking sys-

tem. This means that only the driver's door and

the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle

is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel

on your own.

XTo change the setting: press and hold down

the %and &buttons simultaneously

for about six seconds until the battery indica-

tor lamp flashes twice (Ypage 64).

If the setting of the locking system is changed

within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing

the &or %button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

XTo unlock: press the %button once.

XTo unlock centrally: press the %button

twice.

XTo lock: press the &button.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as

follows:

XTo unlock the driver's door: touch the inner

surface of the door handle on the driver's

door.

XTo unlock centrally: touch the inner surface

of the front-passenger door handle.

XTo lock centrally: touch the outer sensor

surface on one of the door handles.

XTo restore the factory settings: press and

hold down the %and &buttons simul-

taneously for approximately six seconds until

the battery check lamp flashes twice

(Ypage 64).

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or

unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,

use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-

tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm

(Ypage 60).

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-

matically.

XTo unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

XPush release catch :in the direction of the

arrow and at the same time remove mechan-

ical key ;from the SmartKey.

For further information about:

Runlocking the driver's door (Ypage 68)

Rlocking the vehicle (Ypage 68)

Inserting the mechanical key

XPush mechanical key ;completely into the

SmartKey until it engages and release

catch :is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-

ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in

severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal

injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If

a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention

immediately.

SmartKey 63

Opening and closing

HEnvironmental note

Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified spe-

cialist workshop or a special

collection point for used bat-

teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling

and regard for the environment. National guide-

lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-

ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the

batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Checking the battery

XPress the &or %button.

The battery is working properly if battery

check lamp :lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check

lamp :does not light up briefly.

XChange the battery (Ypage 64).

If the SmartKey battery is checked within the

signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing

the &or %button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

iYou can get a battery at any qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

XTake the mechanical key out of the SmartKey

(Ypage 63).

XPress mechanical key ;into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-

tery compartment cover :opens. Do not

hold battery compartment cover :closed

while doing so.

XRemove battery compartment cover :.

XRepeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery =falls out.

XInsert the new battery with the positive ter-

minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to

do so.

XMake sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

64 SmartKey

Opening and closing

XInsert the front tabs of battery compartment

cover :into the housing first and then press

to close it.

XInsert mechanical key ;into the SmartKey

(Ypage 63).

XCheck the function of all SmartKey buttons on

the vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 64) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 64).

If this does not work:

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

XHave the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or

unlock the vehicle using

KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

XReactivate KEYLESS-GO (Ypage 62).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 64) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 64).

If this does not work:

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

SmartKey 65

Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.

XLock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the

SmartKey.

XHave the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-

trol function:

XUnlock (Ypage 68) or lock (Ypage 68) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

XHave the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the Smart-

Key.

the on-board voltage is too low.

XSwitch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:

XCheck the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Ypage 242).

XJump-start the vehicle (Ypage 243).

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the Start/

Stop button. The Smart-

Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.

XUnlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XCheck the SmartKey battery (Ypage 64) and replace it if necessary

(Ypage 64).

If this does not work:

XStart your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

XStart your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-

Key.

XHave the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the

mechanical key.

XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.

66 SmartKey

Opening and closing

Doors

Important safetynotes

GWARNING

If children are leftunsupervised in thevehicle,

they could:

Ropenthedoors,thus endangeringother

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupttraffic.

Roperatethevehicle'sequipment.

Additionally, children could set thevehicle in

motion if, forexample, they:

Rrelease theparking brake.

Rshiftingtheautomatic transmissionout of

parkposition P

RStart theengine.

There is ariskof an accidentand injury.

Whenleavingthevehicle, always take the

SmartKey withyou and lockthevehicle. Never

leavechildren or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep theSmartKey out of

reach of children.

When a dooris opened, thesidewindow on that

sideopens slightly. Whenthedooris closed, the

sidewindow closesagain.

!The sidewindows will notopen/close if the

battery is discharged or if thesidewindows

haveiced up. It will then notbe possible to

close thedoor. Do notattempt to forcethe

doorclosed. You could otherwise damage the

dooror thesidewindow.

Unlockingandopening doors from

theinside

You can open a doorfrom insidethevehicle

evenif it has beenlocked. If thevehicle has been

lockedwiththeSmartKey or withKEYLESS-GO,

opening adoorfrom theinsidewill trigger the

anti-theftalarmsystem. Switchoffthealarm

(Ypage 60).

XPull doorhandle ;.

If thedooris locked, locking knob :popsup.

The dooris unlockedand opens.

Centrally locking andunlocking the

vehicle from theinside

You can centrallylockand unlockthevehicle

from theinside. The switches are on thedriver’s

door.

XTo unlock:press button:.

XTo lock:press button;.

If thefront-passenger dooris closed, thevehi-

clelocks.

Meanwhile, thefuelfiller flap will notbe locked

or unlocked.

You cannotunlockthevehicle centrallyfrom the

insideif thevehicle has beenlockedwiththe

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

The doors can be openedfrom theinside.

If thevehicle has beenlockedwiththeSmartKey

or withKEYLESS-GO,opening adoorfrom the

insidewill trigger theanti-theftalarmsystem.

Switchoffthealarm (Ypage 60).

Doors 67

Opening and closing

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate

is open when the engine is running, particu-

larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes

could enter the passenger compartment.

There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-

gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

GWARNING

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or

not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-

den change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot be

flung around. Secure objects, luggage or

loads against slipping or tipping before the

journey.

!The tailgate swings upwards and out when

opening. Therefore, make sure that there is

sufficient space above the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be

found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Ypage 281).

If the rear spoiler has been extended manually

the height when opened is higher by this

amount. If in doubt, retract the rear spoiler again

manually before opening the tailgate

(Ypage 218).

You can switch the cargo compartment lamp on

and off manually on the overhead control panel

(Ypage 88).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-

partment. You could otherwise lock yourself

out.

You should preferably place luggage or loads in

the cargo compartment. Observe the loading

guidelines (Ypage 205).

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

XPress the Fbutton on the SmartKey.

The tailgate opens slightly.

XRaise the tailgate.

Closing

XPull the tailgate down using recess :and let

it drop into the lock.

XLock the vehicle if necessary with the &

button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO

(Ypage 62).

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.

If you unlock the cargo compartment with

KEYLESS-GO, you could burn yourself by

touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of

injury. Always ensure that you only make the

Cargo compartment 69

Opening and closing

kicking movement within the detection range

of sensors.

!If the SmartKey is within the rear detection

range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-

tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-

tional opening of the tailgate:

Rusing a car wash

Rusing a power washer

Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft

(3 m) awayfrom the vehicle.

General notes

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO without carbon

package: you can unlock the tailgate without

using your hands. This is useful if you have your

hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement

under the rear bumper with your foot.

Observe the following points:

RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-

son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear

detection range of the vehicle.

RWhen making the kicking movement, make

sure that you are standing firmly on the

ground and that there is sufficient clearance

to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise

lose your balance e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking

movement within the detection range of sen-

sors :.

RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the

rear area while doing so.

RDo not come into contact with the bumper

while making the kicking movement. Other-

wise, the sensors may not function correctly.

RUnlocking with KEYLESS-GO does not func-

tion when the engine is started.

RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :

may restrict functionality.

Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-

thetic leg may restrict functionality.

RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-

tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the sensors could

be triggered. Therefore, the tailgate cannot be

unlocked unintentionally if, for example, you:

-sit on the edge of the cargo compartment.

-set something down or lift something up

behind the vehicle.

-polish the rear of the vehicle.

Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your

person in these situations or in situations sim-

ilar to these. This prevents the tailgate from

being unlocked unintentionally.

Operation

XTo unlock: kick into sensor detection

range :below the bumper with your foot.

The tailgate opens slightly.

XTo open: raise the tailgate.

XIf the tailgate does not unlock after sev-

eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds and

then kick under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too

long, the tailgate does not unlock. Repeat the

leg movement more quickly if this occurs.

Unlocking from inside the vehicle

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate

is open when the engine is running, particu-

70 Cargo compartment

Opening and closing

larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes

could enter the passenger compartment.

There is a risk of poisoning.

Turn off the engine before opening the tail-

gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat

when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.

XPress remote operating switch :for the tail-

gate until the tailgate is unlocked.

The tailgate opens slightly.

Tailgate emergency release

Use the emergency release if the tailgate can no

longer be unlocked:

Rusing the SmartKey

Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Rusing the remote operating switch on the

instrument panel

XClimb into the cargo compartment via the

vehicle interior.

Unhook the cargo compartment cover, if nec-

essary (Ypage 206).

XPush carpet :down.

XPull the cable behind the carpet :until the

tailgate unlocks.

The tailgate opens slightly.

XRaise the tailgate.

When you close the tailgate, it is also locked at

the same time.

Side windows

Important safety notes

GWARNING

While opening the side windows, body parts

could become trapped between the side win-

dow and the door frame as the side window

moves. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody touches the side win-

dow during the opening procedure. If some-

body becomes trapped, release the switch or

pull the switch to close the side window again.

GWARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in

the closing area could become trapped. There

is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the

body are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or press

the switch to open the side window again.

GWARNING

If children operate the side windows they

could become trapped, particularly if they are

left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-

matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks

or restricts a side window from traveling

upwards during the automatic closing process,

the side window opens again automatically. Dur-

ing the manual closing process, the side window

Side windows 71

Opening and closing

only opens again automatically after the corre-

sponding switch is released. The automatic

reversing feature is only an aid and does not

relieve you of the responsibility of paying atten-

tion when closing a side window.

GWARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-

gers

Rwhile resetting

This means that the reversing feature cannot

prevent someone being trapped in these sit-

uations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in close

proximity during the closing procedure. If

someone becomes trapped, press the switch

to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-

dows

The switches for all side windows are located on

the driver's door. There is also a switch on the

front-passenger door for the corresponding side

window.

The switch on the driver's door has priority.

:Left

;Right

XSwitch on the power supply or switch on the

ignition with the Start/Stop button.

XTo open manually: press and hold the cor-

responding switch.

XTo open fully: press the switch beyond the

point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

XTo close manually: pull the corresponding

switch and hold it.

XTo close fully: pull the switch beyond the

point of resistance and release it.

Automatic operation is started.

XTo interrupt automatic operation: press/

pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the point of

resistance and release, automatic operation is

started in the corresponding direction. You can

stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling

the switch again.

You can still operate the side windows when you

switch off the power supply or the ignition. This

function remains active for five minutes or until

you open a door.

Convenience opening

General notes

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start

driving.

If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi-

cle, the convenience opening function is availa-

ble.

To do so, open the side windows using the

SmartKey.

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-

able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience opening

XAfter unlocking the vehicle, press and hold

the %button on the SmartKey until the

side windows begin to open.

XWhen the vehicle is unlocked, press and hold

the %button until the side windows have

reached the desired position.

XTo interrupt convenience opening: release

the %button.

72 Side windows

Opening and closing

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When using the convenience closing feature,

parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-

ing area when a side window is being closed.

There is a risk of injury.

Observe the complete closing procedure

when the convenience closing feature is oper-

ating. Make sure that no body parts are in

close proximity during the closing procedure.

When you lock the vehicle, you can close the

windows at the same time.

Using the SmartKey

XPress and hold the &button until the side

windows are fully closed.

XMake sure that all the side windows are

closed.

XTo interrupt convenience closing: release

the &button.

Using KEYLESS-GO

The driver's door and the door at which the han-

dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey

must be outside the vehicle. The gap between

the SmartKey and the corresponding door han-

dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

XTouch recessed sensor surface :on the

door handle until the side windows are fully

closed.

Make sure you only touch recessed sensor

surface :.

XMake sure that all the side windows are

closed.

XTo interrupt convenience closing: release

recessed sensor surface :on the door han-

dle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,

you must reset it.

XClose all the doors.

XSwitch on the power supply or switch on the

ignition with the Start/Stop button.

XPull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is com-

pletely closed (Ypage 72).

XHold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

XImmediately pull the corresponding switch on

the door control panel until the side window is

completely closed (Ypage 72).

XHold the switch for an additional second.

XIf the respective side window remains closed

after the button is released, then it has been

set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the

steps above.

Side windows 73

Opening and closing

Problems with the side windows

GWARNING

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window

closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the

body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or

even fatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

A side window cannot be

closed because it is

blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window

guide.

XRemove the objects.

XClose the side window.

A side window cannot be

closed and you cannot

see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again

slightly:

XImmediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again

slightly:

XImmediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch

again until the side window has closed.

The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Panorama roof

Operating the roller sunblind for the

panorama roof

The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior

from sunlight.

XTo close: pull the roller sunblind in the direc-

tion of the arrow using handle :.

XTo open: slide the roller sunblind in the oppo-

site direction to the arrow using handle :.

74 Panorama roof

Opening and closing

Correct driver's seat position

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steering

wheel :, seat belt ;and driver's seat =:

Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as

possible.

Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.

Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat

cushion.

Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you

can depress the pedals properly.

Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level

by the center of the head restraint.

Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.

Ryou can move your legs freely.

Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument

cluster clearly.

Ryou should have a good overview of traffic

conditions.

Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body

and is routed across the center of your shoul-

der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:

RManual seat adjustment (Ypage 76)

RElectrical seat adjustment (Ypage 77)

RFastening the seat belt correctly (Ypage 40).

RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior

mirrors (Ypage 81).

RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exterior

mirror settings using the memory function

(Ypage 84).

Seats

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Children could become trapped if they adjust

the seats, particularly when unattended.

There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

GWARNING

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle

occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one

has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"

(Ypage 41) and "Children in the Vehicle"

(Ypage 50).

Seats 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

For safety reasons, seat fore-and-aft adjustment

on electrically adjustable seats is only possible

for a maximum of two seconds when the vehicle

is in motion. The seat fore-and-aft adjustment

can then no longer be set.

GWARNING

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or

other vehicle occupants could be trapped and

thereby injured. Children in particular could

accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-

ment buttons and become trapped. There is a

risk of injury.

While moving the seats, make sure that your

hands or other body parts do not get under the

lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-

tem.

GWARNING

If head restraints are not adjusted correctly,

they cannot provide protection as intended.

There is an increased risk of injury in the head

and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident

or when braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle

occupant that the center of the head restraint

supports the back of the head at about eye

level.

GWARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level

of protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you could

slide underneath the seat belt and sustain

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal

injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning

your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

is in an almost vertical position and that the

shoulder section of your seat belt is routed

across the center of your shoulder.

!To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:

Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as

soon as possible.

Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-

ing should also not be used to dry the seats.

Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see "Interior care".

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.

Do not place sharp objects on the seat

cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The

seats should only be occupied by passen-

gers, if possible.

Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulating materi-

als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,

child seats or booster seats.

!Make sure that there are no objects in the

footwell under or behind the seats when mov-

ing the seats back. There is a risk that the

seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

Adjusting the seats manually

General notes

The manually adjustable seat is only available in

Canada.

76 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position

XLifthandle :and slidetheseat forwardsor

backwards.

XReleaselever :again.

Makesurethat you hear theseat engage in

position.

Backrest angle

XRelievethepressureon thebackrest.

XPull lever =up and adjust thebackrest to the

desired angle.

XReleaselever =again.

The seat backrest mustaudibly engage.

Seat height

XPull up or push down lever ;repeatedly until

theseat has reached thedesired height.

Adjusting the seats electrically

:Seat cushion angle

;Seat height

=Backrest angle

?Seat fore-and-aftadjustment

Forsafetyreasons, seat fore-and-aftadjustment

on electrically adjustable seatsis only possible

for amaximum of two seconds when thevehicle

is in motion.The seat fore-and-aftadjustment

can then no longer be set.

iFurther relatedsubjects:

RYou can store theseat settingsusingthe

memory function (Ypage 84).

RIf PRE-SAFE®is triggered,thefront-

passenger seat will be moved to abetter

position if it was previously in an unfavora-

ble position (Ypage 49).

Adjusting the head restraints

XTo raise: pull thehead restraintup to the

desired position.

XTo lower:push thehead restraintdown to the

desired position.

iThe head restraintcan only be adjusted on

manually and electrically adjustable seats,

but notwithAMGPerformance Seats.

Adjusting the lumbar support

You can adjust thecontour of theseat backrests

individually to provideoptimum support for your

back.

Seats 77

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

:To raise the backrest contour

;To soften the backrest contour

=To lower the backrest contour

?To harden the backrest contour

Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat

General notes

To adjust the contour of the seat and for

improved lateral support, you can individually

adjust the front seats.

The AMG Performance seat is designed for the

standard three-point seat belt. If you install

another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing

seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide

the best level of protection.

For further information about the seat belt

(Ypage 39)

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat

cushion and the seat backrest

Driver's seat

Side bolsters of the seat cushion

XTo narrow: press button :.

XTo broaden: press button ;.

Side bolsters of the seat backrest

XTo narrow: press button =.

XTo broaden: press button ?.

Front-passenger seat

Side bolsters of the seat backrest

XTo narrow: press button :.

XTo broaden: press button ;.

iThe side bolsters of the front-passenger

seat cushion cannot be adjusted.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

GWARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can

cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to

become very hot. The health of persons with

limited temperature sensitivity or a limited

ability to react to excessively high tempera-

tures may be affected or they may even suffer

burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on

repeatedly.

78 Seats

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down from

level 3to level 2after approximately eight

minutes.

The system automatically switches down from

level 2to level 1after approximately ten

minutes.

The system automatically switches off approx-

imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

XTo switch on: press button :repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.

XTo switch off: press button :repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

iIf the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The seat heating has

switched off prematurely

or cannot be switched

on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-

ers are switched on.

XSwitch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the

rear window defroster or interior lighting.

Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be

switched back on manually.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

GWARNING

If the steering wheel is unlocked while the

vehicle is in motion, it could change position

unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Before starting off, make sure the steering

wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering

wheel while the vehicle is in motion.

GWARNING

Children could injure themselves if they

adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of

injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can

still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in

the ignition lock.

Steering wheel 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the steering wheel

:Adjusts thesteering wheelposition (fore-

and-aftadjustment)

;Adjusts thesteering wheelheight

iFurther relatedsubjects:

REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Ypage 80)

RStoring settings (Ypage 84)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts

thesteering wheel, you and other vehicle

occupants – particularly children –could

become trapped.There is ariskof injury.

WhiletheEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-

ing adjustments,makesurethat no onehas

any body partsin thesweepof thesteering

wheel.

Movethesteering wheeladjustmentlever if

there is ariskof entrapment by thesteering

wheel. The adjustmentprocess is stopped.

Press oneof thememory function position but-

tons.The adjustmentprocess is stopped. This

function is only available on vehicles withmem-

ory function.

GWARNING

If children activatetheEASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-

ture, they can become trapped,particularly

when unattended. There is ariskof injury.

When leaving thevehicle, always takethe

SmartKey withyou and lockthevehicle. Never

leavechildren unsupervised in thevehicle.

GWARNING

If you drive off while theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT

feature is making adjustments,you could lose

control of thevehicle. There is ariskof an

accident.

Always wait until theadjustmentprocess is

complete before drivingoff.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in

and out of your vehicleeasier.

You can activateand deactivatetheEASY-

ENTRY/EXIT feature usingthemultimedia sys-

tem(see theseparateoperating instructionsfor

themultimedia system).

Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheelswings upwards when you:

Rremove theSmartKey from theignition lock

Ropen thedriver's door and theStop buttonis

in position 1

iThe steering wheelonly moves upwards if it

has notalready reached theupper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing

The steering wheelis moved to thelast selected

position when you:

Rclose thedriver's door and

Rpress theStart/Stopbuttononce

When you close thedriver's door withtheigni-

tion switched on,thesteering wheelis also

automatically moved to thepreviously set posi-

tion.

The last position of thesteering wheelcolumn is

storedafter eachmanual setting or when you

store thesetting withthememory function

(Ypage 84).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If thecrash-responsiveEASY-EXIT feature is trig-

gered in an accident, thesteering column will

moveupwards when thedriver's door is opened

80 Steering wheel

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition

lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and

rescue the occupants.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

GWARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do

the following while driving:

Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,

steering wheel or mirrors

Rfasten the seat belt

There is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine.

GWARNING

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side reduces the size of the image. Visible

objects are actually closer than they appear.

This means that you could misjudge the dis-

tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.

when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

For this reason, always make sure of the

actual distance from the road users traveling

behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

XSelect key position 1or 2with the Start/Stop

button.

XExterior mirror on the front-passenger side:

press button ;.

Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-

ton :.

The indicator lamp lights up in the button that

has been pressed.

The indicator lamp goes out again after some

time. You can adjust the selected mirror using

button =as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

XPress button =up, down, or to the left or

right until you have adjusted the exterior mir-

ror to the correct position. You should have a

good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field

of vision.

After the engine has been started, the exterior

mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-

dow defroster is switched on and the outside

temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically

XSelect key position 1or 2with the Start/Stop

button.

XBriefly press button ?.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

iMake sure that the exterior mirrors are

always folded out fully while driving. They

could otherwise vibrate.

iIf you are driving faster than 30 mph

(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-

rior mirrors.

Mirrors 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-

pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be

reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not

fold in when you select the Automatic Mirror

Folding function in the multimedia system.

XSelect key position 1using the Start/Stop

button.

XBriefly press button ?.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically

When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-

tion is activated in the multimedia system:

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.

Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically

again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

iIf the exterior mirrors have been folded in

manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

position, proceed as follows:

XPress and hold button ?until you hear a click

and the mirror engages audibly into position

(Ypage 81).

The mirror housing is engaged again and you

can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

(Ypage 81).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

GWARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-

matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte

is harmful and causes irritation. It must not

come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-

piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the electrolyte,

observe the following:

RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin

immediately with water.

RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of

your eyes thoroughly with clean water.

RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not

induce vomiting.

RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your

skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical

attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with electrolyte.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on

the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare

mode if the following conditions are met simul-

taneously:

Rthe ignition is switched on

Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-

sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if

reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting

is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-

ror on the front-passenger side

Storing the parking position

You can position the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror in such a way that you can see the

rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage

reverse gear. You can store this position.

82 Mirrors

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Using reverse gear

:Memory button M

;Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

=Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror

?Adjustment button

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

XPress button =.

XStart the engine.

XEngage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the default setting parking posi-

tion.

XUse button ?to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

The parking position is stored.

iIf you shift the transmission to another posi-

tion, the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side returns to the driving position

after approximately ten seconds.

Using the memory button

You can store the parking position of the exte-

rior mirror on the front-passenger side using

memory button M:. The reverse gear must not

be engaged.

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

XPress button =.

XUse button ?to adjust the exterior mirror to

a position that allows you to see the rear

wheel and the curb.

XPress memory button M:and one of the

arrows on button ?within three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior

mirror does not move.

XIf the mirror moves out of position, repeat the

steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

XAdjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button =.

XStart the engine.

XEngage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side

moves back to its original position:

Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)

Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged

reverse gear

Rif you press button ;for the exterior mirror

on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you use the memory function on the driver's

side while driving, you could lose control of

the vehicle as a result of the adjustments

being made. There is a risk of an accident.

Only use the memory function on the driver's

side when the vehicle is stationary.

GWARNING

When the memory function adjusts the seat or

steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-

pants – particularly children – could become

trapped. There is a risk of injury.

While the memory function is making adjust-

ments, make sure that no one has any body

parts in the sweep of the seat or steering

wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

Memory function 83

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

diately release the memory function position

button. The adjustment process is stopped.

GWARNING

Children could become trapped if they acti-

vate the memory function, particularly when

unattended. There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Storing settings

The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition

lock.

With the memory function, you can store up to

three different settings, e.g. for three different

people.

The following settings are stored as a single

memory preset:

Rseat and backrest position

Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors

on the driver's and front-passenger sides

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

XAdjust the seat accordingly (Ypage 77).

XOn the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel

(Ypage 80) and the exterior mirrors

(Ypage 81).

XPress memory button Mand one of the stor-

age position buttons 1,2or 3within three

seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected preset

position. A tone sounds when the settings

have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the corresponding storage

position button 1,2or 3until:

RSeat

RSteering wheel

RExterior mirrors

are in the stored position.

iThe steering wheel and seat adjustment

procedure is interrupted as soon as you

release the storage position button. The

adjustment of the mirror is still carried out.

84 Memory function

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Exterior lighting

General notes

For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you drive with the lights switched on

even during the daytime. In some countries,

operation of the headlamps varies due to legal

requirements and self-imposed obligations.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using:

Rthe light switch

Rthe combination switch (Ypage 86)

Light switch

Operation

1WLeft-hand standing lamps

2XRight-hand standing lamps

3TParking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting

4ÃAutomatic headlamp mode, controlled

by the light sensor

5LLow-beam/high-beam headlamps

BRRear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the

vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

XTurn the light switch to the Ãposition.

The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-

ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:

RSwitch off the engine with the Start/Stop but-

ton

ROpen the driver's door.

Automatic headlamp mode

GWARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.

The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-

ing at all times.

Canada only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility

of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-

ning lamps function is required by law in Can-

ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle is

stationary: if you move the selector lever from a

drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/

low-beam headlamps go out after three

minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-

tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the

light switch to the Tposition, the daytime

running lamps and parking lamps switch on.

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the Lposition, the manual settings

take precedence over the daytime running

lamps.

USA only:

The daytime running lamps improve the visibility

of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the

daytime running lamps function must be

switched on using the on-board computer

(Ypage 157).

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch to the Tor Lposition, the manual

settings take precedence over the daytime run-

ning lamps.

Ãis the favored light switch setting. The light

setting is automatically selected according to

the brightness of the ambient light (exception:

poor visibility due to weather conditions such as

fog, snow or spray):

RIf the Start/Stop button is pressed once: the

parking lamps are switched on or off auto-

Exterior lighting 85

Lights and windshield wipers

matically depending on the brightness of the

ambient light.

RWith the engine running: if you have activated

the Daytime Running Lights function via

the on-board computer, the daytime running

lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam

headlamps are switched on or off automati-

cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-

ent light.

XTo switch on the automatic headlamps:

turn the light switch to the Ãposition.

Low-beam headlamps

GWARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-

beam headlamps may not be switched on

automatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weather

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an

accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch to

When the ignition is switched on and the light

switch is in the Lposition, the parking lamps

and low-beam headlamps are switched on even

if the light sensor does not sense dark condi-

tions. This is a particularly useful function in the

event of rain and fog.

XTo switch on the low-beam headlamps:

select key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton or start the engine.

XTurn the light switch to the Lposition.

The green Lindicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your

vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick

fog. Please take note of the country-specific

regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.

XTo switch on the rear fog lamp: select key

position 2with the Start/Stop button or start

the engine.

XTurn the light switch to the Lor Ã

position.

XPress the Rbutton.

The yellow Rindicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

XTo switch off the rear fog lamp: press the

Rbutton.

The yellow Rindicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps

!If the battery charge is very low, the parking

lamps or standing lamps are automatically

switched off to enable the next engine start.

Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit

area, in accordance with the relevant legal

stipulations. Avoid using the Tparking

lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-

sible, switch on the right-hand Xor left-

hand Wstanding lamps.

XTo switch on: turn the light switch to the

Tposition.

The green Tindicator lamp in the instru-

ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.

XTo switch on the standing lamps: switch off

the engine with the Start/Stop button.

XTurn the light switch to the W(left-hand

side of the vehicle) or X((right-hand side

of the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

:High-beam headlamps

;Turn signal, right

=High-beam flasher

?Turn signal, left

86 Exterior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam

Assist may fail to recognize other road users

that have lights, or may recognize them too

late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-

matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac-

tivated or will be activated regardless. There is

a risk of an accident.

Always carefully observe the traffic conditions

and switch off the high-beam headlamps in

good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are

responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting

to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-

ditions.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

restricted if there is:

Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or

snow

Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are

obscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off

XTo switch on: turn the light switch to the

Ãposition.

XPress the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :.

The _indicator lamp in the multifunction

display lights up when it is dark and the light

sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h):

The headlamp range is set automatically

depending on the distance between the vehi-

cle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above approx-

imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road

users have been detected:

The high-beam headlamps are switched on

automatically. The Kindicator lamp in the

instrument cluster also lights up.

If you are driving at speeds below approx-

imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users

have been detected or the roads are ade-

quately lit:

The high-beam headlamps are switched off

automatically. The Kindicator lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out. The _indi-

cator lamp in the multifunction display

remains lit.

XTo switch off:move the combination switch

back to its normal position or move the light

switch to another position.

The _indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

Certain climatic and physical conditions may

cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This

moisture does not affect the functionality of the

headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview

:uActivates/deactivates the cargo com-

partment lighting

;|Switches the automatic interior light-

ing control on or off

=pSwitches the right-hand reading lamp

on/off

?cActivates/deactivates interior lighting

ApSwitches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from

discharging, the interior lighting functions are

automatically deactivated after some time

except for when the Start/Stop button is in

position 2.

88 Interior lighting

Lights and windshield wipers

Automatic interior lighting control

XTo switch on or off:press the|button.

When theautomatic interior lighting control is

activated, thebuttonis flushwiththeover-

head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if

you:

Runlockthevehicle

Ropen adoor

Rswitch off theenginewiththeStart/Stopbut-

ton

The interior lighting is activated for ashort time

when theengineis switched off withtheStart/

Stop button. This delayedswitch-off can be

adjusted via themultimedia system (see the

separateoperating instructions).

Replacing bulbs

The frontand rear lightclusters of your vehicle

are equipped withLEDlightbulbs.Do not

replace thebulbs yourself.Contact a qualified

specialistworkshop whichhas thenecessary

specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the

workrequired.

Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety.

You mustthereforemakesurethat these func-

tion correctlyat all times.Havetheheadlamp

setting checkedregularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers

on/off

!Do notoperate thewindshield wiperswhen

thewindshield is dry, as this could damage

thewiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-

lectedon thewindshield can scratch theglass

if wipingtakes placewhen thewindshield is

dry.

If it is necessaryto switch on thewindshield

wipersin dry weather conditions, always use

washer fluid when operating thewindshield

wipers.

!If thewindshield wipersleavesmears on the

windshield after thevehiclehas been washed

in an automatic car wash,wax or other resi-

dues may be thereason for this. Clean the

windshield usingwasher fluid after washing

thevehiclein an automatic car wash.

!Intermittent wipingwithrain sensor:due to

optical influencesand thewindshield becom-

ing dirty in dry weather conditions, thewind-

shield wipersmay be activated inadvertently.

This could then damagethewindshield wiper

bladesor scratch thewindshield.

Forthis reason,you should always switch off

thewindshield wipersin dry weather.

1$Windshield wiper off

2ÄIntermittent wipe, low (rainsensor set

to low sensitivity)

3ÅIntermittent wipe, high (rainsensor

set to high sensitivity)

4°Continuous wipe, slow

5¯Continuous wipe, fast

BíSingle wipe

îWipeswithwasher fluid

XSwitchon theignition.

XTurn thecombination switch to thecorre-

sponding position.

In theÄor Åposition,theappropriate

wipingfrequency is set automatically according

to theintensityof therain.In theÅposition,

therain sensor is moresensitive than in

theÄposition,causing thewindshield wiper

to wipe morefrequently.

If thewiper bladesare worn, thewindshield will

no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent

you from observing thetraffic conditions.

Windshield wipers 89

Lights and windshield wipers

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the windshield wipers begin to move while

you are changing the wiper blades, you could

be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of

injury.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and

ignition before changing the wiper blades.

!Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-

shield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a

wiper blade back onto the windshield.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when

you change the wiper blade. If you release the

windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade

and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield

may be damaged by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

!To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the

wiper.

Replacing the wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that they

are vertical

XSwitch off the engine.

XRemove your foot from the brake pedal.

XSet the windshield wiper to the °position.

XPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly until

the windshield wiper starts.

XWhen the wiper arms have reached a vertical

position, press the Start/Stop button.

XFold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

XSet the wiper blade at right angles to the

wiper arm.

XRemove the wiper blade from the retainer on

the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

XSlide the new wiper blade into the retainer on

the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the

arrow.

XTurn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm.

XFold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

90 Windshield wipers

Lights and windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The windshield wipers

are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper

movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.

XSwitch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the

driver's door.

XRemove the cause of the obstruction.

XSwitch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers

fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

XSelect another wiper speed on the combination switch.

XHave the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The windshield washer

fluid from the spray noz-

zles no longer hits the

center of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.

XHave the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

The wiper arms are on

the windshield.

The wiper arms have been moved by an external force.

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop button.

The wiper arms move back down automatically.

Windshield wipers 91

Lights and windshield wipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notes

Observe the settings recommended on the fol-

lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog

up.

To prevent the windows from fogging up:

Rswitch off climate control only briefly

Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly

Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-

tion function

Rswitch on the defrost windshield function

briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and

air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior

filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior

climate.

The cooling with air dehumidification function is

only available when the engine is running. Opti-

mum climate control is only achieved with the

side windows closed.

iVentilate the vehicle for a brief period during

warm weather, e.g. using the convenience

opening feature (Ypage 72). This will speed

up the cooling process and the desired inte-

rior temperature will be reached more

quickly.

iThe integrated filter filters out most parti-

cles of dust and soot and completely filters

out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants

and odors. A clogged filter reduces the

amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.

For this reason, you should always observe

the interval for replacing the filter, which is

specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it

depends on environmental conditions, e.g.

heavy air pollution, the interval may be

shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-

let.

iIt is possible that the blower may be activa-

ted automatically 60 minutes after the engine

has been switched off depending on various

factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The

vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry

the climate control system.

Control panel for dual-zone climate control

:Sets the temperature, left (Ypage 94)

;Sets the air distribution (Ypage 94)

=Sets the airflow (Ypage 95)

Switches off climate control (Ypage 93)

?Sets climate control to automatic (Ypage 94)

ADefrosts the windshield (Ypage 95)

92 Overview of climate control systems

Climate control

BCalls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Ypage 200)

CSwitches the rear window defroster on/off (Ypage 95)

DActivates/deactivates synchronization (Ypage 95)

EActivates/deactivates air-recirculation mode manually (Ypage 96)

FSwitches coolingwith air dehumidification on/off (Ypage 93)

GSets the temperature, right (Ypage 94)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic

climate control

Dual-zone automatic climate control

The following contains instructions and recom-

mendations to enable you to get the most out of

your dual-zone automatic climate control:

RActivate climate control using the Ã

rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the

Ãrocker switch lights up. The "Cooling

with air dehumidification" function is not acti-

vated automatically in automatic mode. If

necessary, activate this function

(Ypage 93).

RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function

briefly until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if

there are unpleasant outside odors or when in

a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,

since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in

air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the climate

control system only operates at a reduced capa-

city. If you require the full climate control output,

you can switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button (Ypage 103).

Operating the climate control sys-

tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notes

When the climate control is switched off, the air

supply and air circulation are also switched off.

The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off

climate control only briefly

Switch on climate control primarily using the

Ãrocker switch (Ypage 94).

Switching on/off

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton (Ypage 100).

XTo switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or

higher using the Hrocker switch.

XTo switch off:set the airflow to level 0 using

the Hrocker switch.

Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification

General notes

If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-

ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will

not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also

not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up

more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling

with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

is only available when the engine is running. The

air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified

according to the temperature selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is

normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-

tion.

Switching on/off

XPress the ¿rocker switch up or down.

The indicator lamp above the ¿rocker

switch lights up or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 93

Climate control

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The indicator lamp over

the ¿rocker switch

flashes three times or

remains off. The cooling

with air dehumidification

function cannot be acti-

vated via the multimedia

system any longer

(Ypage 200).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-

function.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes

In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-

tained automatically at a constant level. The

system automatically regulates the temperature

of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-

tribution.

The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

is activated automatically in automatic mode.

Automatic control

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton (Ypage 100).

XSet the desired temperature using the w

rocker switch.

XTo activate: press rocker switch Ãup or

down.

The indicator lamp above the Ãrocker

switch lights up.

XTo switch to manual operation:press the

Hrocker switch up or down.

XPress the upper or lower section of the _

rocker switch.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or

air distribution manually, the indicator lamp

above the Ãrocker switch goes out. The

function which has not been changed manually,

however, continues to be controlled automati-

cally. When the manually set function switches

back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp

above the Ãrocker switch lights up again.

Setting the temperature

Different temperatures can be set for the driv-

er's and front-passenger sides.

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton (Ypage 100).

XTo increase or reduce: press the w

rocker switch up or down.

Only change the temperature setting in small

increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

¯Directs air through the defroster vents

PDirects air through the center and side air

vents

ODirects air through the footwell air vents

SDirects air through the center, side and

footwell vents

_Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell vents

bDirects air through the defroster, center

and side air vents

aDirects air through the defroster and

footwell vents

Setting

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton (Ypage 100).

XPress the _rocker switch up or down.

The various air distribution settings appear in

the multimedia system.

94 Operating the climate control systems

Climate control

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,

please observe the following notes:

Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and

the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow

or leaves.

Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in

the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents

Example

:Side window defroster vent

;Side air vent, left

=Control for left side air vent

XTo open or close: turn thumbwheel =to the

left or right as far as it will go.

XTo adjust the air direction: hold side air

vent ;in the center and move it up or down

or to the left or right.

Air vents 97

Climate control

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes

The sensor system of some driving and driving

safety systems adjusts automatically while a

certain distance is being driven after the vehicle

has been delivered or after repairs. Full system

effectiveness is not reached until the end of this

teach-in procedure.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is

new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-

formance in the future.

RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle

and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles

(1500 km).

RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),

drive in program C.

RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)

for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).

ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum

engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.

RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,

during this period.

RDo not exceed Ôof the maximum permitted

engine speed for each gear.

RShift up into manual mode Mand temporary

manual drive program in good time.

RDo not carry out a RACE START.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake

the vehicle.

RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal

beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase

the engine speed gradually and accelerate the

vehicle to full speed.

You should also observe these notes on break-

ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on

your vehicle have been replaced.

Always observe the respective speed limits.

Driving

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.

GWARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage

of the pedals, e.g.:

Rshoes with thick soles

Rshoes with high heels

Rslippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.

GWARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

GWARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully

released when driving, the parking brake can:

Roverheat and cause a fire

Rlose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release

the parking brake fully before driving off.

98 Driving

Driving and parking

!Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle

stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high

engine speeds and driving at full throttle until

the engine has reached its operating temper-

ature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to the

desired drive position when the vehicle is sta-

tionary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive

wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.

You could otherwise damage the drive train.

!During a cold start with low engine oil tem-

peratures (below 32 ‡) (0 †), the maximum

engine speed is restricted in order to protect

the engine. To protect the engine and main-

tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at

full throttle when the engine is cold.

Key positions

Start/Stop button

General notes

All vehicles are equipped with a Start/Stop but-

ton.

The Start/Stop button is located in the center

console and is illuminated when the vehicle is

unlocked.

The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in

succession corresponds to the different key

positions in the ignition lock. This is only the

case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-

ately.

A check which periodically establishes a radio

connection between the vehicle and the Smart-

Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when

starting the engine.

If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, this

takes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO start

function.

To start the vehicle without actively using the

SmartKey:

Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Ypage 62).

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another SmartKey.

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.

This can affect the functionality of the Smart-

Key.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's

remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a

short time:

Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition

with the Start/Stop button.

Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the

Start/Stop button until the vehicle is

unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button

on the driver's door (Ypage 67), you can con-

tinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop

button.

The engine can be switched off while the vehicle

is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/

Stop button for three seconds. This function

operates independently of the ECO start/stop

automatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light

up. Further information on situations where an

indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting

the engine or lights up while driving

(Ypage 187).

If Start/Stop button :has not yet been

pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey

being removed from the ignition.

Driving 99

Driving and parking

XTo switch on the power supply: press

Start/Stop button :once.

The power supply is switched on. You can now

activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:

Rthe driver's door is opened and

Ryou press Start/Stop button :twice when in

this position

XTo switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop

button :twice.

The ignition is switched on.

If you press Start/Stop button :once when

in this position, the ignition is switched off

again.

;Start/Stop button USA

=Start/Stop button Canada

SmartKey

You can also start the vehicle with the SmartKey

in the ignition lock.

The ignition lock is located in the rear stowage

space of the center console.

gTo remove the SmartKey

1Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

2Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position

3To start the engine

iThe SmartKey can be turned in the ignition

lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for

the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.

The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

they could:

Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.

Rget out and disrupt traffic.

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P

RStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of

reach of children.

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

out sufficient ventilation.

GWARNING

Flammable materials introduced through

environmental influence or by animals can

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or

100 Driving

Driving and parking

parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk

of fire.

Carry out regular checks to make sure that

there are no flammable foreign materials in

the engine compartment or in the exhaust

system.

General notes

The catalytic converter is preheated for up to

30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the

engine may change during this time.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports

transmission

XShift the transmission to position P

(Ypage 106).

The transmission position display in the mul-

tifunction display shows P(Ypage 108).

You can start the engine in transmission posi-

tion Pand N.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop

button

The Start/Stop button can be used to start the

vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey

into the ignition lock. You merely need to carry

the SmartKey on your person. This mode for

starting the engine operates independently of

the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-

tion.

You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in

the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always

take the SmartKey with you when leaving the

vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.

XDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

XPress the Start/Stop button once

(Ypage 99).

The engine starts.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

XTurn the SmartKey to position 3in the ignition

lock (Ypage 100) and release it as soon as the

engine is running.

If the engine will not start:

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XReinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

after a short waiting period.

XTurn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition

lock (Ypage 100).

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

light up (Ypage 185).

XTurn the SmartKey to position 3in the ignition

lock (Ypage 100) and release it as soon as the

engine is running.

Pulling away

General notes

GWARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position Dor R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is

a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position Dor R,

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do

not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling

away.

The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled

away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at any

time.

You can also deactivate the automatic locking

feature (Ypage 68).

It is only possible to shift the transmission from

position Pto the desired position, if:

Rthe engine is running and

Ryou depress the brake pedal

If you do not depress the brake pedal, the E-

SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking

lock remains engaged.

Information on the automatic release of the

electric parking brake (Ypage 119).

Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-

wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds

the vehicle for a short time after you have

removed your foot from the brake pedal. This

Driving 101

Driving and parking

gives you enough time to move your foot from

the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to

depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

GWARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-

ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the

brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start

assist.

Hill start assist is not active if:

Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a

downhill gradient.

Rthe transmission is in position N.

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.

RESP®is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Introduction

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped

under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when the driver

wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop

function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel

consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and

you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the ignition and secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

General notes

:ECO start/stop display

If the engine has been switched off automati-

cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è

ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-

play.

The ECO start/stop function is only available in

drive program C.

The ECO start/stop function is activated when-

ever you switch on the engine using the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button. This is the case if:

Rthe ignition was switched off for more than

four hours or

Rthe ECO start/stop function had been activa-

ted before the engine was switched off

Automatic engine switch-off

The ECO start/stop function switches the

engine off automatically if:

Rthe ECO start/stop function is activated

(Ypage 103) and

Ryou brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-

mission position D

The ECO start/stop function is operational

when:

Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.

Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric

air pressure is within the range that is suitable

for the system.

Rthe engine and the transmission are at a suf-

ficient temperature for the ECO start/stop

function.

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached

Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.

Rthe system detects that the windshield is not

fogged up when the air-conditioning system is

switched on.

102 Driving

Driving and parking

Rthe hood is closed.

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when

the engine is stopped automatically.

The HOLD function can also be activated if the

engine has been switched off automatically. It is

then not necessary to continue applying the

brakes during the automatic stop phase. When

you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine

starts automatically and the braking effect of

the HOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:

Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by

pressing the ECO button

Rswitch to drive program RACE,S+ or S

(Ypage 105)

Ryou switch to manual mode M(Ypage 110)

Rin transmission position D, the brake pedal is

released and the HOLD function is not active

Ryou depress the accelerator pedal

Ryou engage reverse gear R

Ryou move the transmission out of position P

Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-

er's door

Rthe vehicle starts to roll

Rthe brake system requires this

Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-

ates from the set range

Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-

shield when the air-conditioning system is

switched on

Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low

Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not

start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO

start/stop function

XTo deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;goes out.

XTo activate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ;lights up.

If indicator lamp ;is off, the ECO start/stop

function has been deactivated manually or as

the result of a malfunction. The engine will then

not be switched off automatically when the vehi-

cle stops.

The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if:

Rswitch to drive program RACE,S+ or S

(Ypage 105)

Ryou switch to manual mode M(Ypage 110)

AMG sports exhaust system

You can choose between different AMG sports

exhaust system volumes using the position of

the exhaust flap.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-

ting is activated.

Driving 103

Driving and parking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The engine is not running

smoothly and is misfir-

ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

component of the engine management system.

XOnly depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter

and damage it.

XHave the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-

shop.

The coolant temperature

gauge shows a value

above 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no

longer being cooled sufficiently.

XStop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to

cool down.

XCheck the coolant level (Ypage 226). Observe the warning notes

as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT controller

General information

Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC

SELECT controller.

Available drive programs:

CComfort Comfort-oriented, optimum-

economy engine and trans-

mission settings

SSport Sporty engine and transmis-

sion settings

S+ SportPlus Especially sporty engine and

transmission settings

Race Maximum sportiness and

engine and transmission

settings suitable for the

racetrack

IIndividual Individual settings

Depending on the drive program selected the

following vehicle characteristics will change:

Rthe drive (engine management)

Rthe transmission management

RESP®(Ypage 57)

Rthe suspension (Ypage 135)

Rthe position of the exhaust flap

(Ypage 103)

Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function

(Ypage 102)

Rthe availability of gliding mode

(Ypage 109)

Further information for automatic drive program

characteristics (Ypage 111).

Additionally, in drive program Iyou can config-

ure the respective vehicle characteristics using

the multimedia system. You can find informa-

tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program Cis

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 100).

Selecting the drive program

DYNAMIC SELECT controller 105

Driving and parking

XTurn DYNAMIC SELECT controller :until the

desired drive program is selected.

The selected drive program appears in the

multifunction display. After five seconds the

display goes out and the status icon of the

selected drive program appears.

The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC

SELECT controller :lights up in red.

In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed in the multimedia system dis-

play.

Additional settings

:Manual mode (Ypage 112)

;ECO start/stop function (Ypage 102)

=Position of the exhaust flap (Ypage 103)

?Suspension (Ypage 135)

AESP®(Ypage 57)

When you press buttons :-Athe corre-

sponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC

SELECT controller setting is overwritten.

These settings will also be maintained for man-

ual mode and ESP®if you switch to drive pro-

gram RACE,S+,Sor Cusing the DYNAMIC

SELECT controller.

If you switch to drive program I, all stored char-

acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case

if you have previously pressed one of buttons :

-A. If you then change the drive program using

the DYNAMIC SELECT controller, the standard

setting for the drive program is selected.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports

transmission

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position Dor R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is

a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position Dor R,

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do

not simultaneously accelerate.

GWARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position Nwhen you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

E-SELECT selector lever

General notes

!If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-

cle is rolling, do not shift the transmission

directly from Dto R, from Rto Dor directly to

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission

position Dor R, park position Pis otherwise

engaged automatically.

The transmission could be damaged.

!If you wish to select a transmission position

or to disengage park position P, the engine

must be running.

The E-SELECT lever always returns to its original

position.

The current transmission position P,R,Nor D

appears in the transmission position display in

the multifunction display.

106 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Overview of transmission positions

jPark position with parking lock

kReverse gear

iNeutral

hDrive

Engaging park position P

XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.

XPress button :.

To shift directly from Pto R:

XStart the engine (Ypage 101).

XDepress the brake pedal and push the E-

SELECT lever forwards past the first point of

resistance.

To shift directly from Pto D:

XStart the engine (Ypage 101).

XDepress the brake pedal and push the E-

SELECT lever backwards past the first point of

resistance.

Park position Pis disengaged if you:

Rdepress the brake pedal and

Rpush the E-SELECT lever forwards or back to

the first point of resistance

The transmission shifts to neutral N.

Engaging park position P automatically

Park position Pis engaged automatically in the

following circumstances:

Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/

Stop button and open the driver's or front-

passenger door.

Rif you remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.

Rif you open the door while traveling at low

speed in transmission position Dor R.

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-

mission shifts automatically to transmission

position Pif the HOLD function or DISTRONIC

PLUS is activated. Observe the information on

the HOLD function (Ypage 134) and on

DISTRONIC PLUS (Ypage 129).

Engaging reverse gear R

XStart the engine (Ypage 101).

XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.

XPush the E-SELECT lever forwards past the

first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N

XStart the engine (Ypage 101).

XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.

XPush the E-SELECT lever forwards or back to

the first point of resistance.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in Nfor approximately 30 minutes. If

you open the driver's or front-passenger door

during this period, the transmission automati-

cally shifts to P.

The transmission remains in Nif:

Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock and

Ryou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the trans-

mission to Nbefore switching the engine off

This still applies if you open the driver's or front-

passenger door.

You can find further information under "Car

wash" (Ypage 229).

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 107

Driving and parking

Shifting to transmission position D

XStart the engine (Ypage 101).

XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.

XPush the E-SELECT lever back past the first

point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display

The current transmission position and drive pro-

gram appear in the multifunction display.

:Drive program

;Transmission position

Additionally, displays next to the E‑SELECT lever

show the current transmission position.

The displays light up if you:

Rswitch on the power supply with the Start/

Stop button (Ypage 99) or

Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

(Ypage 100).

The displays go out if you:

Rswitch off the power supply with the Start/

Stop button (Ypage 99) or

Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

(Ypage 100).

If the transmission position display in the mul-

tifunction display is not working, check on the

display next to the E-SELECT lever whether the

desired transmission position is engaged.

Transmission positions

BPark position

This prevents the vehicle from rolling

away when stopped.

Only shift the transmission into posi-

tion Pwhen the vehicle is stationary

(Ypage 106). The parking lock

should not be used as a brake when

parking. Always apply the electronic

parking brake in addition to the park-

ing lock in order to secure the vehi-

cle.

The automatic transmission shifts to

Pautomatically if you:

Rremove the SmartKey

Rswitch off the engine when in Ror

Dand open the driver's door or

front-passenger door

Ropen the driver's door while trav-

eling at low speed in transmission

position Dor R

If the vehicle electronics are malfunc-

tioning, the transmission may be

locked in position P. Have the vehicle

electronics checked immediately at a

qualified specialist workshop.

CReverse gear

Only shift the transmission into posi-

tion Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

108 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

ANeutral

Do not shift the transmission to N

while driving. Otherwise, the auto-

matic transmission could be dam-

aged.

No power is transmitted from the

engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you to

move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push

it or tow it.

If ESP®is deactivated or faulty: shift

the transmission to position Nif the

vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.

on icy roads.

If you switch off the engine using the

SmartKey or the Start/Stop button,

the automatic transmission shifts to

neutral Nautomatically.

!Rolling in neutral Ncan damage

the drive train.

7Drive

The automatic transmission changes

gear automatically in the automatic

drive programs (Ypage 111). All

forward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-

vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-

mission position D. This automatic gear shifting

behavior is determined by:

Rthe selected drive program (Ypage 105)

Rthe position of the accelerator pedal

Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-

matic transmission shifts gear:

Rlittle throttle: early upshifts

Rmore throttle: late upshifts

A dynamic driving style with high longitudinal

and lateral acceleration delays the shift points

to higher engine speeds.

Double-clutch function

When shifting down, the double-clutch function

is active regardless of the currently selected

drive program. The double-clutch function

reduces load change reactions and is conducive

to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by

the double-clutch function depends on the drive

program selected.

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.

XIn the automatic drive programs, depress the

accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

Depending on the engine speed and the selec-

ted drive program, the automatic transmis-

sion shifts to the lowest gear permissible to

give optimal acceleration.

XEase off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Kickdown is not available in manual mode M.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and

forth between transmission positions Dand R

can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck

in mud or snow.

The vehicle's transmission management

restricts shifting between transmission posi-

tions Dand Rto speeds up to a maximum of

5 mph (9 km/h).

To shift back and forth between transmission

positions Dand R, move the E-SELECT lever up

and down past the point of resistance.

Gliding mode

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 109

Driving and parking

Gliding mode is characterized by the following:

Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from

the drive train.

Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idling

speed.

Rstatus icon Cgoes out and status icon :is

displayed in the multifunction display

(Ypage 108).

In drive program C, you can deactivate and acti-

vate gliding mode using the ECO button

(Ypage 103).

Gliding mode can be activated under the follow-

ing conditions:

Rthe speed is within a suitable range.

Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there

are no steep up or downhill gradients.

Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator

pedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the following

conditions:

Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

Ryou depress the brake pedal.

Ryou switch the transmission position using

the E‑SELECT lever (Ypage 106).

Ryou switch to drive program RACE,S+ or S

(Ypage 105).

Ryou switch to manual mode M(Ypage 110).

Ryou leave the suitable speed range.

iIf you have selected the "Comfort" setting

for the drive (engine management) in drive

program I, you can also activate gliding mode.

You can find information about this in the Dig-

ital Operator's Manual.

M button

XPress M button :.

Indicator lamp ;lights up. The letter M

appears in the multifunction display. Manual

mode Mis activated.

Further information on manual mode M

(Ypage 112).

In addition to manual mode M, you can also

activate temporary manual drive program

(Ypage 111).

MManual Permanent manual gear-

shifting

Each time you start the engine using the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program Cis

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 100).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

Using steering wheel paddle shifters :and ;

you can:

Ractivate the temporary manual drive program

and change gear yourself in automatic drive

programs (Ypage 111)

Rchange gear yourself in manual mode M

(Ypage 112)

Ractivate RACE START (Ypage 135)

110 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

Shifting gears

If you pull on the left or right steering wheel

paddle shifter, the automatic transmission

switches to temporary manual drive program for

a limited amount of time. Depending on which

steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the auto-

matic transmission immediately shifts into the

next gear down or up, if permitted.

XTo shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter (Ypage 110).

The automatic transmission shifts up to the

next gear.

If the maximum engine speed on the currently

engaged gear is reached and you continue to

accelerate, the automatic transmission auto-

matically shifts up in order to prevent engine

damage.

The automatic transmission will not shift up to

the next gear when the engine speed is very

low.

XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter (Ypage 110).

The automatic transmission shifts down to

the next gear.

If the engine exceeds the maximum engine

speed when shifting down, the automatic

transmission protects against engine damage

by not shifting down.

Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-

ing.

When using kickdown, the automatic trans-

mission automatically shifts to a lower gear.

Deactivating

If you have activated temporary manual drive

program, it will remain active for a certain

amount of time. Under certain conditions the

minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the

case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun

phase or when driving on steep terrain.

When temporary manual drive program is deac-

tivated, the automatic transmission shifts into

the automatic drive program that was last selec-

ted.

You can also deactivate temporary manual drive

program yourself:

XPull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter and hold it in place (Ypage 110).

XUse the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to

change the drive program (Ypage 105).

Temporary manual drive program is deactiva-

ted. The automatic transmission switches

into the automatic drive program that was last

selected.

Manual mode

General information

In manual mode M, you can permanently change

gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle

shifters. The transmission must be in position D.

The switching times correspond to the previ-

ously active automatic drive program.

The transmission only shifts down automatically

at low engine speeds depending on the respec-

tive gear.

In addition to manual mode M, you can also

activate temporary manual drive program

(Ypage 111).

Activating

In manual mode M, you can change gear your-

self using the steering wheel paddle shifters if

the transmission is in position D. You can see

the currently selected drive program and which

gear is engaged in the multifunction display.

XPress the M button (Ypage 110).

Mis shown in the multifunction display and

the indicator lamp on the M button lights up.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The rec-

112 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission

Driving and parking

ommended gear is shown in the multifunction

display.

XShift to recommended gear ;according to

gearshift recommendation :when shown in

the multifunction display of the instrument

cluster.

Display for shift blocked

If the engine speed becomes too high or too low

as a result of shifting gear, you cannot shift gear

using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you

then pull the left-hand or right-hand steering

wheel paddle shifter, segments :light up red

briefly.

Downshifting

XPull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Ypage 110).

The automatic transmission shifts down to

the next gear if this is permissible.

XMaximum acceleration: pull the left-hand

steering wheel paddle shifter until the trans-

mission selects the optimum gear for the cur-

rent speed.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,

the automatic transmission automatically shifts

down.

Switching off

XPress the M button (Ypage 110).

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

RACE drive program

The RACE drive program is designed for maxi-

mum performance in terms of shift points and

engine speeds. The engine and transmission

should be at normal operating temperature for

the RACE drive program (Ypage 158). Use the

RACE drive program on a closed-off race circuit.

The RACE drive program is characterized by the

following:

RThe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics

suitable for the racetrack.

RAll vehicle systems are set for maximum

sportiness.

RFor optimum performance, the transmission

shifts up later and shifts down sooner.

RThe multifunction display shows the manual

gearshift program without upshift indicator

(Ypage 111).

RThe gearshift recommendation gives you

information for slowly warming up the drive

assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient

driving style (Ypage 112). You can follow the

gearshift recommendations at all times and

shift gear accordingly using the steering

wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the

gearshift recommendation, using the steering

wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the

drive train and engine operating mode at any

time.

RIf you have selected a gear manually, this will

be maintained until the vehicle speed increa-

ses or decreases dramatically.

RIf you do not follow the gearshift recommen-

dations, the automatic shift points may result

in high fuel consumption.

RThe suspension exhibits particularly hard

springing and damping settings.

RThe transmission shift and response times are

significantly shorter with more aggressive

gear changes. This is particularly the case

when shifting up. The shift strategy is thus

designed to interact dynamically with the

high-revving engine

RGliding mode is not available.

RThe ECO start/stop function is not available.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 113

Driving and parking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The transmission has

problems shifting gear.

There is a malfunction in the transmission.

The transmission no longer shifts into the next gear.

XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

The acceleration ability

is deteriorating.

The transmission no lon-

ger shifts into all of the

gears.

A sub geartrain has failed.

The smoothness of the gear change is restricted.

XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel

incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-

sion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before

refueling.

GWARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.

There is a risk of injury.

You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance with-

out delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-

tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-

ing.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

GWARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and

ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and

explosion.

Always touch the vehicle body before opening

the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump

nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is

thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-

eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge

could build up again.

!Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition

if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.

Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could

result in damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop

and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained

completely.

!Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the

fuel system.

!Take care not to spill any fuel on painted

surfaces. You could otherwise damage the

paintwork.

114 Refueling

Driving and parking

!Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.

The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system

could otherwise be blocked by particles from

the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out

when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality

(Ypage 276).

Refueling

General information

Pay attention to the important safety notes

(Ypage 114).

If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,

the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed

8in the instrument cluster. The arrow next

to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-

cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

:To open the fuel filler flap

;To insert the fuel filler cap

=Tire pressure table

?Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

XSwitch off the engine.

XOpen the driver's door.

The on-board electronics now have status 0.

This is the same as the SmartKey having been

removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition

lock:

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XPress the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

XTurn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and

remove it.

XInsert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the

inside of fuel filler flap ;.

XCompletely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and

refuel.

XOnly fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops

filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak

out.

Closing the fuel filler flap

XReplace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.

XClose the fuel filler flap.

Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-

cle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the

8reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display

(Ypage 176).

Refueling 115

Driving and parking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Fuel is leaking from the

vehicle. GWARNING

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

Risk of explosion or fire.

XApply the electric parking brake.

XSwitch off the engine.

XOpen the driver's door.

The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the

SmartKey having been removed.

or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock:

XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

XDo not restart the engine under any circumstances.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot

be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

XUnlock the vehicle (Ypage 61).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

XUnlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Ypage 63).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with

hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust

gas flow. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-

rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-

cle which are hot. Take particular care not to

park on dry grassland or harvested grain

fields.

GWARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

!If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-

cle is rolling, do not shift the transmission

directly from Dto R, from Rto Dor directly to

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission

116 Parking

Driving and parking

position Dor R, park position Pis otherwise

engaged automatically.

The transmission could be damaged.

!Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-

etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:

Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.

Rthe transmission must be in position P.

Rthe SmartKey in the ignition lock must be

turned to position 0and removed from the

ignition lock, or the Start/Stop button must

be pressed.

Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the

curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the

front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for

example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the

rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for

example, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

GWARNING

The automatic transmission switches to neu-

tral position Nwhen you switch off the engine.

The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

accident.

After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-

cle from rolling away by applying the parking

brake.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports

transmission

!Do not remove the SmartKey while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Otherwise, at low speeds,

parking lock Pwill be activated automatically.

Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-

cle is in motion. At low speeds, transmission

position Pis engaged automatically.

This could cause damage to the transmission

and the parking lock.

XApply the electric parking brake.

XShift the transmission to Pwith the button in

the center console.

Using the Start/Stop button

XPress the Start/Stop button (Ypage 99)

The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in

the instrument cluster go out.

When the driver's door is closed, this corre-

sponds to SmartKey position 1. When the

driver's door is open, this corresponds to

SmartKey position 0: "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans-

mission in position Ror D, the transmission

automatically shifts to N.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in Nfor approximately 30 minutes.

If you open the driver's or front-passenger

door during this period, the transmission

automatically shifts to P.

The engine can be switched off in an emer-

gency while the vehicle is in motion by press-

ing and holding the Start/Stop button for

three seconds. This function operates inde-

pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic

engine switch-off function.

Using the SmartKey

XTurn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition

lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore

switching off the engine, the transmission

remains in Nfor approximately 30 minutes. If

you open the driver's or front-passenger door

during this period, the transmission automat-

ically shifts to P.

The transmission remains in Nif:

Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock and

Ryou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the

transmission to Nbefore switching the

engine off

This still applies if you open the driver's or

front-passenger door.

Further information on transmission position

Nwhen operating with a SmartKey is availa-

ble under "Car wash" (Ypage 229).

Parking 117

Driving and parking

Electric parking brake

General notes

GWARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-

cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:

Rrelease the parking brake.

Rshift the automatic transmission out of the

parking position P.

Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-

ment and become trapped. There is a risk of

an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is

dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-

board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in

the system, it may not be possible to apply the

released parking brake.

XIf this is the case, only park the vehicle on

level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling

away.

XShift the automatic transmission to position

It may not be possible to release an applied

parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or

there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop.

The electric parking brake performs a function

test at regular intervals while the engine is

switched off. The sounds that can be heard while

this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

XTo apply: push handle :.

When the electric parking brake is applied,

the red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-

ment cluster.

The electric parking brake can also be applied

when the SmartKey is in position 0.

XTo release: pull handle :.

The red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released

if:

Rthe ignition was switched on using the Start/

Stop button or

Rthe SmartKey is in position 1or 2in the igni-

tion lock (Ypage 100)

Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is automatically

applied when the transmission is in position P

and:

Rthe engine is switched off or

Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the

driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being

automatically applied, pull handle :.

The electric parking brake is also engaged auto-

matically if:

RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a

standstill or

Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-

tionary

118 Parking

Driving and parking

In addition, at least one of the following condi-

tions must be fulfilled:

Rthere is a system malfunction

Rthe power supply is insufficient

Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period

The red F(USA only) or !(Canada only)

indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights

up.

The electric parking brake is not automatically

engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO

start/stop function.

Releasing automatically

Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-

matically released if all of the following condi-

tions are met:

Rthe engine is running.

Rthe transmission is in position Dor R.

Rthe seat belt has been fastened.

Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate

must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically

release the electric parking brake:

Rthe driver's door is closed.

Ryou have shifted out of transmission position

Por you have previously driven faster than

2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator

pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking

brake will be released and the vehicle will start

to move.

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-

gency by using the electric parking brake.

XWhile driving, push handle :of the electric

parking brake (Ypage 118).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keep

handle :of the electric parking brake

pressed. The longer electric parking brake

handle :is depressed, the greater the brak-

ing force.

During braking:

Ra warning tone sounds

Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes-

sage appears

Rthe red F(USA only) or !(Canada

only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-

still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

General notes

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than

four weeks, the battery may be damaged by

exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six

weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a

result of lack of use.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and seek

advice.

iYou can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialist work-

shop.

Trickle charging the on-board electrical

system battery

The battery may drain if the vehicle is left sta-

tionary for long periods. In this case, Mercedes-

Benz recommends attaching the trickle charger

to the 12 V socket in the cargo compartment. A

trickle charger can be obtained from an author-

ized Mercedes-Benz Center, for example.

XSwitch the ignition off.

XOpen the tailgate.

Parking 119

Driving and parking

XConnect the cable providedin the cargo com-

partment to the trickle charger.

XConnect the trickle charger to 12 V socket :.

Consult the manufacturer's operating instruc-

tions on how to do so.

The tailgate can be closed, even if a trickle

charger is connected. Make sure that the con-

nector for both the connector cables is outside

of the vehicle.

The connector can then separate if the vehicle is

moved, even if you forget to disconnect the con-

nector cables. This prevents damaging the

cables and the trickle charger.

A trickle charger connected to 12 V socket :

only maintains the current charge level of the

vehicle's electrical system battery. If the vehi-

cle's electrical system battery is discharged, it

needs to be charged with a battery charger.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

withlimitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

GWARNING

If you operate mobile communication equip-

ment while driving, you will be distracted from

traffic conditions. You could also lose control

of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the vehicle

is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country

in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while

driving a vehicle.

If you make a call while driving, always use

hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone

when the traffic situation permits. If you are

unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop

before operating the telephone.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a

distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-

ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

XThe tires should always be inflated to the rec-

ommended tire pressure.

XRemove unnecessary loads.

XWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.

XAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.

XHave all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in the Main-

tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-

play.

Fuel consumption also increases when driving in

cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-

rain.

Drinking and driving

GWARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and

driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-

ment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-

dent is greatly increased when you drink or

take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow

anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-

ing drugs.

Emission control

GWARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces with-

out sufficient ventilation.

120 Driving tips

Driving and parking

Certain engine systems are designed to keep

the level of poisonous components in exhaust

fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if

they are serviced exactly in accordance with the

manufacturer's specifications. Always have

work on the engine carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work

relevant to safety or on safety-related systems

must be carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop.

The engine settings must not be changed under

any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific

service work must be carried out at regular

intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-

Benz service requirements. Details can be found

in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

!On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a

lower gear in good time. This allows you to

take advantage of the engine's braking effect.

This helps you to avoid overheating the

brakes and wearing them out excessively.

When you take advantage of engine braking, a

drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.

on a slippery road surface. This could cause

damage to the drive train. This type of damage

is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-

ranty.

This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC

PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated.

Heavy and light loads

GWARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, the braking system can overheat. This

increases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is a

risk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

depress the brake pedal and the accelerator

pedal at the same time.

!Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear to

the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy

load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive

on for a short while. This allows the airflow to

cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain

without braking, there may be a delayed reac-

tion from the brakes when braking for the first

time. This may also occur after the vehicle has

been washed or driven through deep water.

You have to depress the brake pedal more

firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle

washed, brake firmly while paying attention to

the traffic conditions. This will warm up the

brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly

and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-

treated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-

due may form on the brake discs and brake

pads. This can result in a significantly longer

braking distance.

Driving tips 121

Driving and parking

Observe the following rules when driving on salt-

treated roads:

RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the

brakes occasionally while paying attention to

the traffic conditions.

RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes

!The brake fluid level may be too low, if:

Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and

Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is

running

Observe additional warning messages in the

multifunction display.

The brake fluid level may be too low due to

brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked immediately.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop to

arrange this.

!A function or performance test should only

be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If

you wish to operate the vehicle on such a

dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-

erwise damage the drive train or the brake

system.

!The ESP®system operates automatically.

The engine and the ignition must therefore be

switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-

tion 0or 1in the ignition lock or the Start/

Stop button must be in position 0or 1) if the

electric parking brake is tested on a brake

dynamometer.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may

cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake

system must be carried out at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to

moderate loads, you should test the functional-

ity of your brakes at regular intervals.

Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Ypage 54).

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-

mends only installing the following brake disks

and brake pads/linings:

Rbrake disks that have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz

Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent

standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can

compromise the safety of your vehicle.

Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/

linings on an axle at the same time. Always

install new brake pads/linings when replacing

brake disks.

The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake

disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and

threaded connection is matched.

The use of brake disks other than those

approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the

track width and is subject to approval, if appli-

cable.

Shock-type loads when handling the brake

discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead

to a reduction in comfort when driving with light-

weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on

the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the

brake plate.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use

brake fluid that has been specially approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-

sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake

fluid which has not been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an

equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's

operating safety.

AMG high-performance and ceramic

brakes

The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy

loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This

will depend on:

RSpeed

RBraking force

REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-

ture and humidity

The wear of individual components of the brake

system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake

discs, depends on the individual driving style

and operating conditions.

For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-

age that will be valid under all circumstances. An

122 Driving tips

Driving and parking

aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain more information on this from a

qualified specialist workshop.

New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after several

hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for

this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and

braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-

ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear

warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note

any brake status messages in the multifunction

display. Especially for high performance driving,

it is important to maintain and have the brake

system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth on

the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-

planing occurring, even if:

Ryou drive at low speeds

Rthe tires have adequate tread depth

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in

conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,

you must drive in the following manner:

Rlower your speed

Ravoid ruts

Ravoid sudden steering movements

Rbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads

!Do not drive through flooded areas. Check

the depth of any water before driving through

it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-

erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or

the engine compartment. This can damage

the electronic components in the engine or

the automatic transmission. Water can also

be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles

and this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

GWARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.

GDANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate

ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the

vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating

running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area

around the vehicle are clear of snow. To

ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a

window on the side of the vehicle that is not

facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-

faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and

braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be

stopped when moving at low speed:

XShift the transmission to position N.

The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device and

is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Changes in the outside temperature are dis-

played after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing

point do not guarantee that the road surface is

free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in

wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could

skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always

adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to

suit the prevailing weather conditions.

You should pay special attention to road condi-

tions when temperatures are around freezing

point.

Driving tips 123

Driving and parking

For more information on driving with snow

chains, see (Ypage 252).

For more information on driving with summer

tires, see (Ypage 252).

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-

tion (Ypage 252).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road speed

for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid

exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower

gear in good time on long and steep downhill

gradients. This is especially important if the

vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use

of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves

the load on the brake system and prevents the

brakes from overheating and wearing too

quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-

ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady

speed for a prolonged period. You can store any

road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

:Stores the current speed or a higher speed

;Stores the current speed or calls up the last

stored speed

=Stores the current speed or a lower speed

?Deactivates cruise control

When you activate cruise control, the stored

speed is shown in the multifunction display for

five seconds. In addition, the ésymbol

appears in the multifunction display. In the

speedometer, the segments between the stored

speed and the maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the current

speed

You can store the current speed if you are driv-

ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

XAccelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

XBriefly press the cruise control lever up :or

down ;.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-

matically maintains the stored speed.

iCruise control may be unable to maintain

the stored speed on uphill gradients. The

stored speed is resumed when the gradient

evens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-

matically applying the brakes.

Storing, maintaining and calling up a

speed

GWARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it is lower

than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-

ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the

vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There

is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

124 Driving systems

Driving and parking

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The first time cruise control is activated, it

stores the current speed or regulates the

speed of the vehicle to the previously stored

speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

the speed set.

XPress the cruise control lever up :for a

higher speed or down ;for a lower speed.

XTo adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-

ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press

the cruise control lever up :or down ;to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

XTo adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-

ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press

the cruise control lever up :or down ;

beyond the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

iCruise control is not deactivated if you

depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-

ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after

you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-

trol:

XLightly press the cruise control lever for-

wards :.

XBrake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

Ryou engage the electric parking brake

Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)

RESP®intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile

driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a

warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐

trol Off message in the multifunction display

for approximately five seconds.

iWhen you switch off the engine, the last

speed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-

matically helps you maintain the distance to the

vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected

with the aid of the radar sensor system.

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that

the set speed is not exceeded.

Driving systems 125

Driving and parking

Change into a lower gear in good time on long

and steep downhill gradients. This is especially

important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you

will make use of the braking effect of the engine.

This relieves the load on the brake system and

prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-

ing too quickly.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision

with the vehicle in front, you will be warned vis-

ually and acoustically. Without your interven-

tion, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a colli-

sion. An intermittent warning tone will then

sound and the distance warning lamp will light

up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately

in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in

front or take evasive action providedit is safe to

do so.

DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range

from 0 mph (0 km/h) to 120 mph (200 km/h).

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on

roads with steep gradients.

As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it

can resemble the radar detectors of the respon-

sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant

chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions

are asked about this.

iUSA only: This device has been approved by

the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The

radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-

motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-

ing, or altering of the device will void any war-

ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do

not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

iCanada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device

will void any warranties, and is not permitted.

Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-

approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:

Rpeople or animals

Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-

ped or parked vehicles

Roncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give

warnings nor intervene in such situations.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-

uation and be ready to brake.

GWARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-

tify other road users and complex traffic sit-

uations.

In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicle

Rneither give a warning nor intervene

Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly

There is a risk of an accident.

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to

brake, in particular when warned to do so by

DISTRONIC PLUS.

GWARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up

to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.

If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC

PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is

a risk of an accident.

In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and

try to take evasive action.

!When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-

tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-

ically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in

the following or similar situations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

126 Driving systems

Driving and parking

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC

PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor

override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS

cannot take into account the road, traffic and

weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an

aid. You are responsible for the distance to the

vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in

good time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in

heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-

erating could cause the drive wheels to lose

traction and the vehicle could then skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-

cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-

cles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is snow or heavy rain

Rthere is interference by other radar sources

Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-

ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle

in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the

speed stored.

This speed may:

Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or

an exit lane

Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-

tries)

Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-

cles driving on the right (right-hand drive

countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

:Activates or increases speed

;Activates or reduces speed

=Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS

?Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed

ASets a specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-

lowing conditions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to

two minutes after pulling away before

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.

Rthe electric parking brake must be released.

RESP®must be active, but not intervening.

Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from Pto Dor your seat belt must be

fastened.

Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must

be closed.

Activating

Driving systems 127

Driving and parking

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ;, up :or down =.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

XTo adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-

ments (1 km/hincrements):briefly press

the cruise control lever up :to the pressure

point for a higher speed, or down =for a

lower speed.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up or down, the last speed stored is increased

or reduced.

XTo adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-

ments (10 km/hincrements):briefly press

the cruise control lever up :past the pres-

sure point for a higher speed, or down =for

a lower speed.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up or down, the last speed stored is increased

or reduced.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the

vehicle in front, but only up to the desired

stored speed.

iIf you do not fully release the accelerator

pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-

sage appears in the multifunction display. The

set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in

front will then not be maintained. You will be

driving at the speed you determine by the

position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when

stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is

20 mph (30 km/h).

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ;or press it up :or down =.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed

GWARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs

from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates. If you do not know the

stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or

brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-

tions before calling up the stored speed. If you

do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.

XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it

is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-

erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the

previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

XIf you want to pull away with DISTRONIC

PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.

XAccelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed

to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is

detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to

the set speed.

iThe vehicle can also pull away when it is

facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on

a different line from another vehicle. The vehi-

128 Driving systems

Driving and parking

cle then brakes automatically. There is a risk

of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS

operates in the same way as cruise control.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in

front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In

this way, the distance you have selected is main-

tained.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving

vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.

However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to

the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive program

DISTRONIC PLUS assists a sporty driving style

when you have selected the Sor S+ drive pro-

gram (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).

Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the

set speed is then noticeably more dynamic.

When you select the Cdrive program, the vehi-

cle accelerates more gently. This setting is rec-

ommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanes

If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC

PLUS supports you when:

Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)

RYou switch on the appropriate turn signal

RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of

collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is

accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if

changing lanes takes too long or if the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle in front

becomes too small.

iWhen you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS

monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-

cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-

cles.

Stopping

GWARNING

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked

only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-

cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected.

Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

Further information on deactivating DISTRONIC

PLUS (Ypage 130).

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in

front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is

stationary.

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-

tionary and you do not need to depress the

brake.

iAfter a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

iDepending on the specified minimum dis-

tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at

a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in

front. The specified minimum distance is set

using the control on the cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

when the vehicle is stationary and:

Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the

driver's door is open.

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may

also shift into position Pautomatically.

Driving systems 129

Driving and parking

Setting a speed

XPress the cruise control lever up :for a

higher speed or down ;for a lower speed.

XTo adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-

ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press

the cruise control lever up :or down ;to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

XTo adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-

ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press

the cruise control lever up :or down ;to

the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is pressed

up :or down ;, the last speed stored is

increased or reduced.

iIf you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC

PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last

speed stored after you have finished overtak-

ing.

Setting a specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance for

DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span

between one and two seconds. With this func-

tion, you can set the minimum distance that

DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,

dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this

distance in the multifunction display

(Ypage 131).

iMake sure that you maintain the minimum

distance to the vehicle in front as required by

law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front

if necessary.

XTo increase: turn control ;in direction =.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front.

XTo decrease: turn control ;in direction :.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS:

XBriefly press the cruise control lever for-

wards :.

XBrake, unless the vehicle is stationary

If you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see

the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the mul-

tifunction display for approximately five sec-

onds.

iThe last speed stored remains stored until

you switch off the engine.

iDISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you

depress the accelerator pedal.

130 Driving systems

Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated

if:

Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the

vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-

tric parking brake

RESP®intervenes or you deactivate ESP®

Rthe transmission is in the P,Ror Nposition

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you

in order to pull away and the front-passenger

door or one of the rear doors is open

Rthe vehicle has skidded

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear

a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC

PLUS Off message in the multifunction display

for approximately five seconds.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,

segments between the speed of the vehicle in

front :and stored speed ;light up.

iFor design reasons, the speed displayed in

the speedometer may differ slightly from the

speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-

vated

On the on-board computer, you can select the

assistance graphics display.

:Vehicle in front, if detected

;Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front

=Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

?Own vehicle

XSelect the Assistance Graphic function

using the on-board computer (Ypage 155).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted

:DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears

when the cruise control lever is actuated)

;Vehicle in front, if detected

=Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable

?Own vehicle

XSelect the Assistance Graphic function

using the on-board computer (Ypage 155).

You will see the stored speed for about five sec-

onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Driving systems131

Driving and parking

cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will

not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi-

cles that are crossing your lane. Activating

DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing

traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to

pull away unintentionally.

HOLD

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the

following situations:

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes

Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes

Rwhen waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver

having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD

function deactivated when you depress the

accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away

despite being braked by the HOLD function if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

partment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected

There is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the HOLD function and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

!When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-

tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-

ically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in

the following or similar situations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Ypage 134).

Activation conditions

You can activate the HOLD function if:

Rthe vehicle is stationary

Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function

Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is

fastened

Rthe electric parking brake is released

Rthe transmission is in position D,Ror N

Activating the HOLD function

Driving systems 133

Driving and parking

XMake sure that the activation conditions are

met.

XDepress the brake pedal.

XQuickly depress the brake pedal further

until :HOLD appears in the multifunction

display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can

release the brake pedal.

iIf depressing the brake pedal the first time

does not activate the HOLD function, wait

briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated automatically

if:

Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in

position Dor R.

Ryou shift the transmission to position P.

Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain

amount of pressure until HOLD disappears

from the multifunction display.

Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park-

ing brake.

iAfter a time, the electric parking brake

secures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle

automatically if the HOLD function is activated

when the vehicle is stationary and:

Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the

driver's door is open.

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-

matically switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If the electric parking brake is not operational, a

horn will sound at regular intervals. The HOLD

function must then be deactivated.

If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission

may be shifted into position Pautomatically.

The Brake Immediately message may also

appear in the multifunction display.

XImmediately depress the brake firmly until the

warning message in the multifunction display

goes out.

The HOLD function is deactivated. The horn

sounds at regular intervals if you have switched

off the engine, released the seat belt and

opened the driver's door with the HOLD function

activated. The sounding of the horn alerts you to

the fact that the HOLD function is still activated.

If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone

becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked

until you have deactivated the HOLD function.

iAfter switching off the engine, it can only be

started again once you have deactivated the

HOLD function.

RACE START

Important safety notes

iRACE START must not be used on normal

roads. RACE START must only be activated

and used on dedicated road circuits, outside

of public road use.

RACE START enables optimal acceleration from

a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip

road surface is required, along with the tires and

vehicle being in proper operating condition.

GWARNING

If you use RACE START, individual tires may

start to spin and the vehicle could skid.

Depending on the selected ESP®mode, there

is an increased risk of skidding and having an

accident. Make sure that no persons, animals

or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.

iObserve the safety notes on driving safety

systems (Ypage 53).

Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-

tion on ESP®(Ypage 57).

Conditions for activation

You can activate RACE START if:

Rthe doors are closed.

Rthe engine is running and the engine and

transmission are at operating temperature.

This is the case when the oil temperature

gauge in the multifunction display is shown in

white (Ypage 158).

RESP®is functioning correctly. (Ypage 57)

Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

position.

134 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is

depressed sufficiently (left foot).

Rthe transmission is in position D.

Rdrive program S,S+ or RACE is selected

(Ypage 105).

Activating RACE START

iWhen manual mode (Ypage 112) is active,

the transmission automatically shifts up to

RACE START in the drive program. This func-

tion supports maximum acceleration with

RACE START. After going through an acceler-

ating process once from a stationary position,

this function is automatically deactivated.

XDepress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.

XPull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift-

ers.

XThe RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP

Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in

the multifunction display.

XRelease both steering wheel paddle shifters.

iIf the activation conditions are no longer ful-

filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE

START Not Possible See Operator's

Manual message appears in the multifunction

display.

XTo cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle

shifter (Ypage 110).

XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-

dle shifter (Ypage 110).

The RACE START Available Depress gas

pedal. message appears in the multifunction

display.

iIf you do not depress the accelerator pedal

within a few seconds, RACE START is can-

celed. The RACE START Canceled message

appears in the multifunction display.

XFully depress the accelerator pedal.

The engine speed is increased.

The RACE START Release brake to start

message appears in the multifunction display.

iIf you do not release the brake pedal within

a short time, RACE START will be canceled.

The RACE START Canceled message

appears in the multifunction display.

XTake your foot off the brake, but keep the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-

ation.

The RACE START Active message appears in

the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle

reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-

ada: 50 km/h).

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you

release the accelerator pedal during RACE

START or if any of the activation conditions are

no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐

sible See Operator's Manual or RACE

START Canceled message appears in the mul-

tifunction display.

iIf RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again

after the vehicle has been driven a certain

distance.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-

tem

General notes

The electronically controlled damping system

works continuously. This improves driving

safety and ride comfort.

The damping is tuned individually to each wheel

and depends on:

Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty

Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps

Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or

Comfort

The suspension setting is adjusted using the

corresponding button in the center console.

iThe mode can also be set using the

DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Ypage 105).

Each time you start the engine with the Smart-

Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is

activated. For further information about starting

the engine, see (Ypage 100).

Driving systems135

Driving and parking

mine which warning display is active when the

engine is running.

Transmission posi-

tion

Warning display

DFront area activated

R,Nor the vehicle is

rolling backwards

Rear and front areas

activated

PNo areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-

cle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:

Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-

mittent warning tone for approximately two

seconds.

Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately two seconds.

This indicates that you have now reached the

minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

:Indicator lamp

;Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp :lights up, PARKTRONIC is

deactivated.

iPARKTRONIC is automatically activated

when you set the Start/Stop button to key

position 2.

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Only the red segments in

the PARKTRONIC warn-

ing displays are lit. You

also hear a warning tone

for approximately two

seconds.

PARKTRONIC is then

deactivated and the indi-

cator lamp on the

PARKTRONIC button

lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.

XIf problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Only the red segments in

the PARKTRONIC warn-

ing displays are lit.

PARKTRONIC is then

deactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.

XClean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Ypage 232).

XSwitch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-

sound waves.

XSee if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

138 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera :is located in the rear

bumper, underneath the tailgate.

Rear view camera :is an optical parking and

maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your

vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-

tem display.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

iThe text shown in the multimedia system

display depends on the language setting. The

following are examples of rear view camera

messages in the multimedia system display.

Important safety notes

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a

replacement for your attention to your immedi-

ate surroundings. You are always responsible

for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure

that there are no persons, animals or objects in

the maneuvering area while maneuvering and

parking in parking spaces.

Under the following circumstances, the rear

view camera will not function, or will function in

a limited manner:

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog

Rat night or in very dark places

Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

Rif the camera lens fogs up, e.g. when driving

into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid

change in temperature

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed

Observe the notes on cleaning

(Ypage 233)

Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this

event, have the camera position and setting

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear

view camera may be restricted due to additional

accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.

license plate holder, bicycle rack).

The guide lines in the multimedia system display

show the distances to your vehicle. The distan-

ces only apply to road level.

Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera

XTo activate: ensure that key position 2has

been selected with the Start/Stop button.

XMake sure that the Activation by R gear

function is selected in the multimedia system

(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

XEngage reverse gear.

The area behind the vehicle is shown with

guide lines in the multimedia system display.

The image from the rear view camera is avail-

able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-

vates if you shift the transmission to Por after

driving forwards a short distance.

Messages in the multimedia system dis-

play

The rear view camera may show a distorted view

of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.

The rear view camera does not show objects in

the following positions:

Rvery close to the rear bumper

Runder the rear bumper

!Objects not at ground level may appear to

be further away than they actually are, e.g.:

Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ra slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the bottom-

most guideline.

Driving systems 139

Driving and parking

:Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the

vehicle

;White guide line without turning the steering

wheel, vehicle width including the exterior

mirrors (static)

=Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

?Yellow lane marking of the tires at current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

AYellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

BVehicle center axle (marker assistance)

CBumper

DRed guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when the transmis-

sion is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

:Front warning display

;Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator

=Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when

PARKTRONIC is operational (Ypage 137), addi-

tional measurement operational readiness indi-

cator ;appears in the multimedia system dis-

play. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are

active or light up, warning displays :and =

are also active or light up correspondingly in the

multimedia system display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space

without turning the steering wheel

:White guide line without turning the steering

wheel, vehicle width including the exterior

mirrors (static)

;Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

=Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-

cle

?Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

140 Driving systems

Driving and parking

XMake sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Ypage 139).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

XWith the help of white guide line :, check

whether the vehicle will fit into the parking

space.

XUsing white guide line :as a guide, carefully

back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line ?is then at the end of parking

space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the

parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle

:Parking space marking

;Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

XDrive past the parking space and bring the

vehicle to a standstill.

XMake sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Ypage 139).

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

XWhile the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the

steering wheel in the direction of the parking

space until yellow guide line ;reaches park-

ing space marking :.

XKeep the steering wheel in that position and

back up carefully.

:Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

XStop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in

front of the parking space.

The white lane should be as close to parallel

with the parking space marking as possible.

:White guide line at current steering wheel

angle

;Parking space marking

XTurn the steering wheel to the center position

while the vehicle is stationary.

Driving systems 141

Driving and parking

:Red guide lineat adistanceof approximately

12 in (0.30m) from the rear of the vehicle

;White guide line without turning the steering

wheel

=End of parking space

XBack up carefully until you have reached the

final position.

Red guide line :is then at the end of parking

space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the

parking space.

Wide-angle function

:Symbol for the wide-angle view function

;PARKTRONIC warning displays

You can also use the rear view camera to select

a wide-angle view.

When PARKTRONIC is operational (Ypage 137),

a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the

display of the multimedia system. If the

PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-

ing displays ;light up in the multimedia system

display in yellow or red respectively.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,

monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is

active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph

(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST

detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-

ing lapses in concentration on the part of the

driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It

might not always recognize fatigue or increasing

inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them

at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-

rested and attentive driver.

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is

restricted and warnings may be delayed or not

occur at all:

Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-

imately 30 minutes

Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface

is uneven or if there are potholes

Rif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-

eration

Rif you are predominantly driving slower than

37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph

(200 km/h)

Rif the time has been set incorrectly

Rin active driving situations, such as when you

change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment

is deleted and restarted when continuing the

journey, if:

Ryou switch off the engine

Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-

er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to

take a break

142 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Displaying theattention level

You can havecurrentstatus information dis-

playedin theassistancemenu (Ypage 156) of

theon-boardcomputer.

XSelecttheAssistancedisplay forAttention

Assistusingtheon-boardcomputer

(Ypage 155).

The followinginformation is displayed:

RLengthof thejourney since thelast break.

Rtheattention level determined by ATTENTION

ASSIST (Attention Level), displayedin a

bar display in fivelevels from highto low

RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate

theattention level and cannotissue awarn-

ing, theSystem Suspended message

appears.The bar display then changes the

display, e.g. if you are drivingat aspeed below

37 mph (60 km/h) or above124mph

(200km/h).

Activating ATTENTIONASSIST

XActivateATTENTION ASSIST usingtheon-

boardcomputer (Ypage 157).

The systemdetermines theattention level of

thedriver dependingon thesetting selected:

Selection Standard:thesensitivity withwhich

thesystemdetermines theattention level is set

to normal.

Selection Sensitive:thesensitivity is set

higher.The attention level detectedby Attention

Assistis adapted accordingly and thedriver is

warned earlier.

WhenATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

ésymbol appears in themultifunction dis-

play in theassistancegraphicdisplay.

WhenATTENTION ASSIST has beendeactivated,

it is automatically reactivated after theengine

has beenstopped. The sensitivity selectedcor-

responds to thelast selection activated (stand-

ard/sensitive).

Warning in themultifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration

are detected, awarningappears in themulti-

function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a

Break!.

In addition to themessageshown in themulti-

function display, you will then hear awarning

tone.

XIf necessary, take abreak.

XConfirmthemessageby pressing thea

buttonon thesteeringwheel.

On longjourneys, take regular breaksin good

time to allow yourselfto rest. If you do nottake

abreak and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects

increasing lapses in concentration,you will be

warned again after 15 minutes at theearliest.

Thiswill only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still

detects typical indicatorsof fatigue or increas-

inglapses in concentration.

If awarningis output in themultifunction dis-

play, aservicestation search is performed in

COMAND. You can select a servicestation and

navigation to this servicestation will then begin.

Thisfunction can be activated and deactivated

in COMAND.

LaneTracking package

General notes

The LaneTrackingpackage consistsof Blind

Spot Assist (Ypage 143) and LaneKeeping

Assist (Ypage 145).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes

Blind Spot Assistmonitors theareas on either

sideof thevehicle that are notvisible to the

driver withtwolateral, rear-facingradar sen-

sors. Awarningdisplay in theexteriormirrors

draws your attention to vehicles detectedin the

monitored area. If you then switch on thecor-

respondingturn signal to changelanes, you will

also receive a visual and audible collision warn-

ing.

Blind Spot Assistsupports you from aspeed of

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving systems 143

Driving and parking

Important safety notes

GWARNING

BlindSpot Assist does not react to:

Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot area

Rvehicleswhichapproach with a large speed

differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, BlindSpot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of

an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions care-

fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

BlindSpot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for

attentive driving. Always ensure that there is

sufficient distance to the side for other road

users and obstacles.

iUSA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC as

a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor

is intended for use in an automotive radar

system only. Removing, tampering with, or

altering the device will void any warranties,

and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-

per with, alter, or use in any non-approved

way.

Any unauthorized modification to this device

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors for BlindSpot Assist are inte-

grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the

bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The

sensors must not be covered, for example by

cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a

severe impact or in the event of damage to the

bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

BlindSpot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring area

In particular, the detection of obstacles can be

impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain, snow or spray

Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or

bicycles

Rthe road has very wide lanes

Rthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane

Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

Example:Sedan

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft

(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to

your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the

lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be

indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-

ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the

case if there are vehicles driving at the inner

edge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:

Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving

close to crash barriers or similar solid lane

borders.

Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

extended period next to long vehicles, such as

trucks.

144 Driving systems

Driving and parking

Warning display

:Warning display

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in

the monitoring range are then not indicated.

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator

lamp :in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow

at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds

above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp

goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot

monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp :on the correspond-

ing side lights up red. This warning is always

emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot

monitoring range from behind or from the side.

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only

occurs if the difference in speed is less than

7 mph (12 km/h).

If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist

is not operational.

The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-

matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-

roundings.

Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of

Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-

sponding turn signal, a double warning tone

sounds. Red warning lamp :flashes. If the turn

signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-

ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.

There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

XMake sure that Blind Spot Assist

(Ypage 156) is activated in the on-board

computer.

XSelect key position 2with the Start/Stop but-

ton.

Warning lamps :in the exterior mirrors light

up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and

then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of

your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-

era :which is attached behind the top of the

windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects

lane markings on the road and can warn you

before you leave your lane unintentionally.

This function is available in the range between

40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

A warning may be given if a front wheel passes

over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of

intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for

up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes

GWARNING

Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly

recognize lane markings.

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning

Rnot give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and stay in lane, in particular if

warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

Driving systems 145

Driving and parking

GWARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not

return the vehicle to the original lane. There is

a risk of an accident.

You should always steer, brake or accelerate

yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-

ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-

ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-

dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane

Keeping Assist cannot take into account the

road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-

ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible

for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-

cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-

ing in your lane.

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-

cle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function

if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient

illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,

fog or spray

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the

sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface

is wet)

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-

ity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings

for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction

work

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-

ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small

and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-

ted

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes

branch off, cross one another or merge

Rthe road is narrow and winding

Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

XActivate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-

board computer; to do so, select Standard or

Adaptive (Ypage 157).

If you drive at speeds above 40 mph

(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

the lines in the assistance graphics display

(Ypage 155) are shown in green. Lane Keep-

ing Assist is ready for use.

Standard

When Standard is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this

event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-

tain period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Adaptive

When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-

tion occurs if:

Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this

event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-

tain period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,

BAS or ESP®.

Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

Ryou brake hard.

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.

Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-

sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-

ing, the system recognizes certain conditions

and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.

Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.

Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou cut the corner on a bend

146 Driving systems

Driving and parking

The coolant temperature display is in the lower

section of the tachometer (Ypage 31).

Under normal operating conditions and with the

specified coolant level, the coolant temperature

may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

:Multifunction display

;Right control panel

=Left control panel

XTo activate the on-board computer: set the

Start/Stop button to key position 1.

You can control the multifunction display and

the settings in the on-board computer using the

buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

òROpens the menu list

Press briefly:

RScrolls in lists

RSelects a menu or function

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

opens the track or station list and

selects a station, an audio track or

a video scene

RIn the Telephone menu: switches

to the phone book and selects a

name or a telephone number

Press and hold:

RScrolls quickly through all lists

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

selects a station, audio track or

video scene using rapid scrolling

RIn the Telephone menu: starts

rapid scrolling if the phone book is

open

aRIn all menus: confirms the selected

entry in the list

RIn the Radio or Media menu:

opens the list of available radio

sources or media

RIn the Telephone menu: switches

to the phone book and starts dial-

ing the selected number

ñRSwitches off the Voice Control

System (see the separate operat-

ing instructions)

%Press briefly:

RBack

RIn the Radio or Media menu: dese-

lects the track or station list or list

of available radio sources or media

RHides display messages

RExits the telephone book/redial

memory

%Press and hold:

RCalls up the standard display in the

Trip menu

Right control panel

~RRejects or ends a call

RExits the telephone book/redial

memory

6RMakes or accepts a call

RSwitches to the redial memory

RAdjusts the volume

8RMute

óRSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-

tem (see the separate operating

instructions)

148 Displays and operation

On-board computer and displays

Multifunction display

:Transmission position (Ypage 108)

;Time

=Outside temperature (Ypage 147)

?Display

AAdditional speedometer (Ypage 158)

Display panel ?shows the selected menu or

submenu and display messages.

The multifunction display shows the unit in addi-

tional speedometer Ainverse to the speedom-

eter unit in the instrument cluster.

XTo open the menu list: press òon the

steering wheel.

Display panel ?appears in the menu list.

Possible displays in the multifunction display:

R=PARKTRONIC (Ypage 136)

R¯Cruise control (Ypage 124)

R_Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Ypage 87)

RèECO start/stop function (Ypage 102)

RëHOLD function (Ypage 133)

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

Press the òbutton on the steering wheel to

open the menu list.

Operating the on-board computer (Ypage 148).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can

select the following menu:

RTrip menu (Ypage 149)

RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Ypage 150)

RRadio menu (Ypage 152)

RMedia menu (Ypage 153)

RTelephone menu (Ypage 154)

RAssistance Graphic menu (Ypage 155)

RService menu (Ypage 156)

RSettings menu (Ypage 156)

RAMG menu (Ypage 158)

Trip menu

Standard display

XPress and hold the %button on the steer-

ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-

eter :and odometer ;appears.

Calling up the range

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Trip menu.

XPress :or 9to select the approximate

Range.

The approximate range that can be covered

depends on the fuel level and your current

driving style. If there is only a small amount of

fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-

eled Cappears instead of approximate

range.

Menus and submenus 149

On-board computer and displays

Route guidance not active

:Direction of travel

;Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

:Distance to the next destination

;Estimated arrival time

=Distance to the next change of direction

?Current road

Change of direction announced with a

lane recommendation

:Road into which the change of direction

leads

;Distance to the change of direction

=Change-of-direction symbol

?Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)

APossible lane

BLane not recommended (dark gray)

On multilane roads, new lane recommendations

can be displayed for the next change of direction

if the digital map supports this data. During the

change of direction, new lanes may be added.

Lane not recommended B: you will not be able

to complete the next change of direction if you

stay in this lane.

Possible lane A: you will only be able to com-

plete the next change of direction in this lane.

Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be

able to complete the next change of direction

and the one after that.

Menus and submenus 151

On-board computer and displays

position is only displayed along with station ;if

this has been stored.

You can store TV channels ;in the multimedia

system.

XSwitch on the multimedia system (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Radio menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

Currently set station ;appears in the multi-

function display.

XTo open the station list: press :or 9

briefly.

XTo select a station in the station list:

press :or 9briefly.

XTo select a station in the station list using

rapid scroll: press and hold :or 9.

XTo select the frequency range or station

memory: press abriefly.

XPress :or 9to select the frequency

range or station memory.

XPress ato confirm your selection.

iSIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a

normal radio.

Further information on radio operation can be

found in the multimedia system (see the sep-

arate operating instructions).

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and playback

mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media

menu.

XSwitch on the multimedia system (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Media menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XTo open/close the media sources

list:press abriefly.

The list shows the following media sources,

for example:

RDisc (CD/DVD) (DVD COMAND only)

RSD card (COMAND)

RMedia Register (COMAND)

RUSB storage device

RBluetooth®capable audio device

Please observe further information on media

support and media operation in the multimedia

system (see separate operating instructions).

Operating an audio player or audio

media

:Media source, e.g. name of USB memory

stick

;Current title

=Name of artist

?Name of album

AFolder name

Audio data from various audio devices or media

can be played, depending on the equipment

installed in the vehicle.

XSwitch on the multimedia system (see sepa-

rate operating instructions).

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Media menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XTo select audio player or data carrier:press

abriefly, to open the list of media sour-

ces.

Menus and submenus 153

On-board computer and displays

You will see one of the following display mes-

sages in the multifunction display:

RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found a net-

work and is ready to receive.

RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searching for

a network.

Accepting a call

If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐

phone menu, a display message appears in the

multifunction display.

You can accept a call at any time, even if you are

not in the Telephone menu.

XPress the 6button on the steering wheel

to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call

You can end or reject a call at any time even if

you are not in the Telephone menu.

XPress the ~button on the steering wheel

to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Telephone menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the :,9or abutton to

switch to the phone book.

XPress :or 9to select the names one

after the other.

XTo start rapid scrolling: press and hold :

or 9for longer than one second.

The names in the phone book are displayed

quickly one after the other.

If you press and hold the :or 9button

for longer than five seconds, the name

appears with the next or previous letter initial

letter in the alphabet.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the

button or reach the end of the list.

XIf only one telephone number is stored for

a name: press the 6or abutton to

start dialing.

XIf there is more than one number for a

particular name:press the 6or a

button to display the numbers.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

number you want to dial.

XPress the 6or abutton to start dialing.

XTo exit the telephone book: press the ~

or %button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names or

numbers dialed in the redial memory.

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Telephone menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress the 6button to switch to the redial

memory.

XPress the :or 9button to select the

desired name or number.

XPress the 6or abutton to start dialing.

XTo exit the redial memory: press the ~

or %button.

Assistance graphic menu

Menus and submenus 155

On-board computer and displays

XUse òon the steering wheel to call up the

list of menus.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Assistance Graphic

menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

The multifunction display shows the

DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the

assistance graphic.

The assistance graphic displays the status of

and information from the following driving

systems or driving safety systems:

RDISTRONIC PLUS (Ypage 125)

RDistance warning function of COLLISION

PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Ypage 54)

RBlind Spot Assist (Ypage 143)

RATTENTION ASSIST (Ypage 142)

RLane Keeping Assist (Ypage 145)

XPress :to display the ATTENTION ASSIST

assessment.

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

Service menu:

RCalling up display messages in message

memory (Ypage 162)

RChecking the tire pressure electronically

(Ypage 257)

RCalling up the service due date

(Ypage 228)

RChecking the engine oil level using the on-

board computer (Ypage 225)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in the

vehicle, you have the following options in the

Settings menu:

RChanging assistance settings (Ypage 156)

RChanging the light settings (Ypage 157)

RChanging the instrument cluster settings

(Ypage 157)

RRestoring the factory settings (Ypage 158)

Assistance submenu

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-

VENTION ASSIST PLUS

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress 9or :to select Collision

Prevention.

XPress ato confirm.

The current selection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press the abut-

ton again.

When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

is deactivated, the æsymbol appears in

the multifunction display in the Assistance

Graphic menu.

For further information about COLLISION PRE-

VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Ypage 54).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Blind Spot

Assist.

XPress ato confirm.

The current selection appears.

XTo activate/deactivate: press the abut-

ton again.

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray

radar waves propagating backwards appear

next to the vehicle in the Assistance

Graphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,

see (Ypage 143).

156 Menus and submenus

On-board computer and displays

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select ATTENTION

ASSIST.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Off,Standard

or Sensitive.

XPress ato confirm the selection.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the

ésymbol appears in the Assistance

Graphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTION

ASSIST, see (Ypage 142).

Setting Lane Keeping Assist

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress the :or 9button on the steering

wheel to select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the DriveAs‐

sist submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XPress :or 9to select Lane Keeping

Assist.

XPress ato confirm.

Press :or 9to select Off,Standard

or Adaptive.

XTo change the setting: press aagain.

For further information about Lane Keeping

Assist, see (Ypage 145).

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/

off

This function is not available in Canada.

XPress òon the steering wheel to open the

menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the Lights

submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XUsing :or 9, select the Daytime

Running Lights function.

If the Daytime Running Lights function has

been switched on, the cone of light and the

Wsymbol in the multifunction display are

shown in white.

XPress the abutton to save the setting.

Further information about Daytime Running

Lights(Ypage 85).

Instrument cluster submenu

Setting the brightness of the display/

switch

You can use the Brightness function to set the

brightness of the multifunction display and the

switches in the vehicle in increments.

XPress the òbutton on the steering wheel

to open the menu list.

XPress :or 9on the steering wheel to

select the Settings menu.

XConfirm by pressing aon the steering

wheel.

XPress :or 9to select the Instru‐

ment Cluster submenu.

XPress ato confirm.

XUsing :or 9, select the Brightness

function.

XPress ato confirm.

You can see the selected setting Level with a

value between 0 and 10. Level 0 corresponds

to a dim light and level 10 corresponds to a

bright light.

XPress the :or 9button to change the

brightness. The brightness is set simultane-

ously with the selection.

XPress the aor %button to save the

setting.

Menus and submenus 157

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Inoperative See

Operator'sManual

ESP®is malfunctioning.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

ESP®is temporarily unavailable.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

The ÷warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.

The self-diagnosis function might notbe complete, for example.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above. The wheels could thereforelockif you brake

hard, for example.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can thus

increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XCarefully drive on asuitable stretch of road, making slight steering

movementsat aspeed above12 mph (20 km/h).

If thedisplay message disappears, thefunctionsmentioned above

are available again.

If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

164 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Inoperative See

Operator'sManual

EBD(electronic brakeforce distribution), ABSand ESP®are malfunc-

tioning.

Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-

tion.

In addition,the÷and !warning lampslightup in theinstru-

mentclusterand awarning tone sounds.

GWARNING

The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the

functionslisted above. The frontand rear wheels could thereforelock

if you brakehard, for example.

The steerabilityand braking characteristics may be severely affected.

The braking distancein an emergencybraking situation can increase.

If ESP®is notoperational, ESP®is unable to stabilizethevehicle.

There is an increased riskof skiddingand an accident.

XDrive on carefully.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.

Brake Immediately

Amalfunction has occurred while theHOLD function or DISTRONIC

PLUSis active.

Atone may also soundat regular intervals. If you attemptto lockthe

vehicle, thetone becomeslouder.

You cannotstart theengine.

XPayingattention to thetraffic situation,immediately depress the

brakepedal firmly and hold until thedisplay message disappears.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 116).

F(USA

only)!(Canada

only)

TurnOn the Igni‐

tionto Releasethe

ParkingBrake

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp lights

up.

You attemptedto release theelectric parking brakewhile theignition

was switched off.

XSwitchon theignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canada

only)

Please ReleasePark‐

ing Brake

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and awarning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic release of the

electric parking brakeis notfulfilled (Ypage 118).

You are drivingwiththeelectric parking brakeapplied.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and awarning tone sounds.

You are usingtheelectric parking brakefor emergencybraking

(Ypage 118).

Display messages 165

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

F(USA

only)!(Canada

only)

ParkingBrake See

Operator'sManual

The yellow !warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To apply:

XSwitchtheignition off.

XPress theelectric parking brakehandle for at least tenseconds.

XShift thetransmission to position P.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

The yellow !warning lamp and thered F(USAonly) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp lightup.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To release:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 118).

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XDo notdrive on.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

The red F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and theyellow !warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

To release:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XReleasetheelectric parking brakemanually.

To apply:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XApply theelectric parking brakemanually.

If thered F(USAonly) or !(Canada only) indicator lamp con-

tinuesto flash:

XDo notdrive on.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 269).

XShift thetransmission to position P.

XTurn thefrontwheels towardsthecurb.

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

166 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. The red F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds

after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedor released. It then

goesout or remainslit.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XApply theelectric parking brake.

If it is notpossibleto engage theelectric parking brake:

XShift thetransmission to position P.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

If it is notpossibleto release theelectric parking brakemanually:

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 118).

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release theelectric parking brake, thered F(USAonly) or !

(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning.It is notpossibleto apply

theelectric parking brakemanually.

XShift theselector lever to P,as theelectric parking brakeis not

appliedautomatically.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

If it is notpossibleto release theelectric parking brakemanually:

XReleasetheelectric parking brakeautomatically (Ypage 118).

F(USA

only)!(Canada

only)

ParkingBrake Inop‐

erative

The yellow !warning lamp lights up. The red F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds

after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedor released. It then

goesout or remainslit.

The electric parking brakeis malfunctioning,e.g. because of over-

voltageor undervoltage.

XRemove thecausefor theovervoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging thebattery or restarting theengine.

XEngage or release theelectric parking brake.

If it remainsimpossible to apply or release theelectric parking brake:

XSwitchoff theignition and turnit backon.

XEngage or release theelectric parking brake.

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe released:

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbe applied:

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 167

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

The yellow !warning lamp lights up and thered F(USAonly)

or !(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.

It is notpossibleto apply theelectric parking brakemanually.

XShift thetransmission to position P.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canada

only)

Check Brake Fluid

Level

There is notenough brakefluid in thebrakefluid reservoir.

In addition,the$(USAonly) or J(Canada only) warning lamp

lights up in theinstrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.

GWARNING

The braking effectmay be impaired.

There is ariskof an accident.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinuedriving

under any circumstances.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 116).

XConsult aqualified specialist workshop.

XDo notadd brakefluid.This does notcorrectthemalfunction.

Check Brake Pad Wear

The brakepads/linings havereached their wear limit.

USAonly: thered $brakesystem warning lamp also lights up while

theengineis running.

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative

Oneor moremain features of thembrace system are malfunctioning.

XHavethembrace system checkedimmediately at aqualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐

tionAssist Plus

Currently Unavaila‐

ble See Operator's

Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis temporarily notoperational.

Possiblecauses are:

Rtheradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-

tromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor

other sourcesof electromagneticradiation

Rthesystem is outside theoperating temperature range

Rtheon-boardvoltageis toolow.

Whenthecauses statedaboveno longer apply, thedisplay message

disappears.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSis operational again.

If thedisplay message does notdisappear:

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 116).

XRestart theengine.

168 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

Transmission Mal‐

function Stop

Amalfunction has occurred in themechanical transmission compo-

nents.

Awarning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shiftsto posi-

tion N.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XShift theselector lever to position P.

XSecurethevehicleagainst rollingaway (Ypage 116).

XNotify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

DepressBrake to

Start Engine

You cannotstart theengine. The enginewas switched off in position D

or R.

XDepress thebrakepedal and start theengine.

OnlyShift to 'P'

whenVehicleis Sta‐

tionary

The vehicleis moving.

XPull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonas possible, paying

attention to roadand traffic conditions.

XShift thetransmission to position P.

ParkingLockMal‐

funct. Apply Park‐

ing Brake

Transmission position Pcannotbe selected.

XMakesurethat theelectric parking brakeis applied.

XPreventthevehiclefrom rollingaway before you leaveit

(Ypage 269).

XVisit aqualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Oil

CoolingMalfunction

The transmission coolantpump is faulty. The transmission may over-

heat.

XIn theon-boardcomputer, select theAMG menuand checkthe

transmission oil temperature (Ypage 158).

XAvoid excessive loading,e.g. due to dynamic driving.

XIf thetransmission oil temperature is less than 248‡(120 †), you

can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Trans. Oil Overhea‐

ted Drive on with

Care

The transmission oil has overheated.

Manual mode Mand temporary manual drive program are no longer

available. Only the Comfort setting is available for the transmission.

The engine output is reduced according to the degree of overheating.

XAllow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive driving

style.

Electronic Rear

Axle Differential

Lock Inoperative

The electronic rear axle differential lock is inoperative.

XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.

Electronic Rear

Axle Differential

Lock Currently

Unavailable

The electronic rear axle differential lock motor has overheated.

XAllow electronic rear axle differential lock to cool by adopting a

defensive driving style.

182 Display messages

On-board computer and displays

Engine

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

;NThe yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:

Rin the engine management

Rin the fuel injection system

Rin the exhaust system

Rin the ignition system

Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency

mode.

XHave the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon

as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-

ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations

apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8NThe yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

XRefuel at the nearest gas station.

8NThe yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

In addition, the ;Check Engine warning lamp may light up.

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

XIf the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.

XIf the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

?NThe red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the

coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine

damage if the coolant temperature is too high.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 116).

XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 191

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

?NThe red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or

the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 116).

XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

XCheck the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Ypage 226).

XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-

tem checked.

XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

XDo not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡

(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

XDrive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,

and stop-and-go traffic.

?NThe red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning

tone also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡(120 †). The airflow to the engine

radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

GWARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which

may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.

Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur

just by opening the hood.

There is a risk of injury.

XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention

to road and traffic conditions.

XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Ypage 116).

XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has

cooled down.

XCheck the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes

(Ypage 226).

XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant sys-

tem checked.

192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,

slush or ice.

XAt coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.

XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,

and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/

indicator

lamp

NSignal type

Possible causes/consequences and MSolutions

·NThe red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning

tone also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too

high a speed.

XBe prepared to brake immediately.

XPay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take

evasive action.

For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE-

VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Ypage 54).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 193

On-board computer and displays

Product specificaties

Merk:	Mercedes
Categorie:	Personenwagen
Model:	AMGGT 2017

Heb je hulp nodig?

Als je hulp nodig hebt met Mercedes AMGGT 2017 stel dan hieronder een vraag en andere gebruikers zullen je antwoorden

Uw naam*

Jouw email*

Schrijf hier uw vraag

Handleiding Personenwagen Mercedes

Mercedes GLE Coupe 2018 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes E-Class 2017 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes G 500 2005 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes CLS 2020 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes E-CLASS Sedan - AMG - 2021 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2019 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes CL600 - 2000 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes GLE Coupe 2016 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes C-Class 2017 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Mercedes GLC Coupe 2018 Handleiding

4 Mei 2023

Handleiding Personenwagen

Nieuwste handleidingen voor Personenwagen

Opel Ampera E 2017 Handleiding

22 Oktober 2023

Kia Cee-d Handleiding

16 Oktober 2023

Kia Carens 1 Handleiding

16 Oktober 2023

Kia Carens II Handleiding

16 Oktober 2023

Kia e-Soul - 2019 Handleiding

16 Oktober 2023

Audi A1 Handleiding

5 Oktober 2023

Audi Q3 Handleiding

5 Oktober 2023

Audi S5 Cabriolet Handleiding

5 Oktober 2023

Audi A5 Coupe - 2015 Handleiding

5 Oktober 2023

Audi S3 Handleiding

5 Oktober 2023